Swamini Vato (Gunatitanand Swami)
स्वामिनो वार्ताः
Discourses of Gunatitanand Swami (1785–1867), the first Akshar after Swaminarayan. Recorded in Gujarati by disciples, these talks expound the Akshar-Purushottam relationship, the nature of the Brahmaswarup saint, and the path to moksha.
Chapter 1 · 342 shlokas
+ Add ShlokaVaat 1.1
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 1 · Chapter 1 · Verse 1
Anādi Mūḷ Akṣharmūrti Shrī Guṇātītānand Swāmīe vāt karī je, Bhagwān ne Sādhunā mahimānī vātu nirantar karavī ne sāmbhaḷvī. Ne Mahāraj to potānu Akṣhardhām ne pārṣhad ne potānu samagra aishvarya te laīne āhī padhāryā chhe. Te evā ne evā ja chhe. Ne deh mūkīne jene pāmavā chhe, te āj deh chhatā maḷyā chhe, kāī bākī nathī; ne em na samajāy tethī jīvmā durbaḷtā rahe chhe, ne em samajāy tyāre koī divas jīvmā durbaḷtā manāy ja nahi; ne jīv bījī rītno thaī jāy chhe. Ne mahimā samajvā jevu bīju koī moṭu sādhan paṇ nathī ne mahimā vinā bījā game eṭlā sādhan kare, to paṇ jīv baḷne pāme nahi. Ne evo mahimā samajvānu kāraṇ to evā Bhagwadīno prasang chhe, paṇ te vinā evo mahimā samajāto nathī.
One should continuously engage in delivering and listening to talks on the glory of God and his Sadhu. Maharaj has come here (to earth) with his Akshardham, pārshads and all his powers. He is exactly the same (today).1 He whom we wish to attain after death, we have attained during this life; there is nothing more left to attain. If this truth is not understood properly, the jiva remains weak. Once this is understood, the jiva will no longer consider itself weak and will acquire a different mettle. Also, there is no greater endeavour than to understand the glory of God. Without understanding the glory, even countless other endeavours will not enable the jiva to attain spiritual strength. The means to understanding this glory is profound association with such a holy Sadhu, and without it the true glory of God cannot be understood. Footnotes: 1. 1. Meaning, the human form on earth is the same as the divine form in Akshardham.
Vaat 1.2
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 2 · Chapter 1 · Verse 2
Sānkhya-vichār1 karvā shīkhavo. Ne sānkhya vinā lobh, kām, svād, sneh ne mān e pānch doṣh tathā adhyātma,2 adhibhūt,3 ne adhidaiv4 e traṇ tāp e sarvenu dukh maṭe nahi. Ne sānkhya vinā aradho satsang kahevāy. Māṭe sukhiyā rahevāne arthe sānkhya-vichār shīkhavo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Yathārth gnān, samyak vichār, antardraṣhṭi, deh, lok ne bhog mithyā samajavā ne ātmāne satya samajavo. 2. Sharīr ane mannā dukh. 3. Panchabhūt sambandhī, pṛuthvī parnā manuṣhyo sambandhī - chorī, tīḍ paḍavā vagere dukho. 4. Dev sambandhī āpadā: ativṛuṣhṭi, duṣhkāḷ, dharatīkamp vagere.
Without learning the teachings of Sānkhya,1 faults such as greed, lust, taste, attachment and ego, and the three miseries – due to adhyātma, adhibhut and adhidaiv2 – cannot be removed. Without Sānkhya, satsang is said to be only half complete. Thus, to remain happy learn the principles of Sānkhya. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sānkhya – to realize that the body, the world and all worldly pleasures are perishable. And to believe the ātmā and Paramātmā to be permanent and focus the mind on it. 2. Adhyātma – miseries of the mind. Adhibhut – physical illnesses, miseries. Adhidaiv – floods, famines, earthquakes, plagues and other natural disasters.
Vaat 1.3
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 3 · Chapter 1 · Verse 3
Prahlādjīe Nārāyaṇ sāthe ghaṇā divas yuddha karyu1 paṇ Bhagwān jitāṇā nahi, pachhī Bhagwāne Prahlādne kahyu je, “E yuddhe karīne to hu jitāu evo nathī ne mane jītvāno upāy to e chhe je, jībhe karīne māru bhajan karavu, manmā māru chintavan karavu, netramā mārī mūrti rākhavī. E prakāre nirantar mārī smṛuti karavī.” Em kahyu chhe; pachhī evī rīte Prahlāde abhyās karyo tyāre Bhagwān chha māsmā vash thaī gayā. Māṭe Bhagwānne rājī karavāne arthe ā upāy sarvoparī chhe te shīkhavo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ek vakhat Chyavan Ṛuṣhi vahelī savāre snān karavā gayā tyāre temane koī asure laī jaī pātāḷmā Vāsuki Nāgnā bandhanmā rākhyā; paṇ Ṛuṣhinā bhajanthī nāgnu zer ochhu thatu jaṇāyu. Āthī, nāge Ṛuṣhine daityānā rājā Prahlādne sopyā. Prahlāde potāne mṛutyuloknā badhā tīrth karāvavānī sharate Ṛuṣhine mṛutyulokmā pahochāḍyā. Tyār pachhī Ṛuṣhi ane Prahlād tīrth karatā Badrikāshrammā āvyā. Tyā Naranārāyaṇ Ṛuṣhine dhanuṣhyabāṇ sahit tap karatā joī, te rākhavānu kāraṇ pūchhyu. Tyāre Bhagwāne uttar āpyo ke, “Tārā jevā daityane māravā māṭe rākhyā chhe.” Ām, Bhagwān tarafthī āvo uttar maḷatā Prahlāde yuddha karyu hatu.
Prahladji fought for many days with Narayan, but God was not won over. Then God told Prahlad, “I cannot be won over by such wars. The way to win me over is by singing my bhajans, thinking of me in your mind and cherishing my murti in your eyes. In this way, always remember me.” Then, Prahlad tried this method and God was won over within six months. Thus, to please God, learn this method, which is the best.
Vaat 1.4
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 4 · Chapter 1 · Verse 4
Bhagwānnī moṭāī jenā antarmā samajāṇī hoy tene game tevā desh-kāḷnī1 avaḷāī thāy athavā dehmā game evo rog thaī āve ityādikmā paṇ em samaje je, ‘Bhagwānnā karyā vinānu pānaḍu paṇ koīnu halāvyu haltu nathī,’ em samajīne sukhī rahe; ne em na samaje tene koī prakārno desh-kāḷ āve to satsang chūnthāī jāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Desh-kāḷ, jamāno, bījā arthmā āpatti. Vyāpak arthmā desh-kāḷ shabdathī āṭhnu grahaṇ thāy chhe: desh, kāḷ, kriyā, sang, mantra, shāstra, dīkṣhā ne dhyān.
If one has from within (essentially and earnestly) understood the glory of God, then whatever difficult circumstances1 arise or whatever ill health arises, one still believes, “Without God’s wish nobody can move even a leaf.” With this understanding, one remains happy. And if one does not understand this and encounters difficult circumstances, then his satsang will be spoiled. Footnotes: 1. 1. The eight factors of place, time, action, company, mantra, holy scriptures, initiation and meditation may be adverse and troublesome.
Vaat 1.5
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 5 · Chapter 1 · Verse 5
Ā jīv sādhan te shu karashe? E to jem kos joḍīne vāḍī karavī temā ghaṇo dākhḍo, kem je, tene ḍhor khāy, pankhī khāy. Tem sādhan vate kalyāṇ thāvu te evu chhe. Ne Bhagwānnī prāpti vate kevu thāy chhe? To jem ākhī pṛuthvīmā varsād varase ne dāṇā pāke chhe. Pachhī tene ḍhor khāy, pankhī khāy, chor laī jāy topaṇ khūṭe nahi. Ne kūvā, taḷāv ne nadiyu khūṭe paṇ samudra na khūṭe, tem Bhagwān vate kalyāṇ te evu chhe, ne ā to bahu ja durlabh chhe paṇ mahimā samajāto nathī.
What spiritual endeavours will this jiva undertake? Attaining moksha through spiritual means can be likened to farming with the aid of bullocks and a labourer to irrigate the field by drawing water from a well. It requires a great deal of effort. The little crop that is raised is eaten by cattle and birds. Attaining moksha through the grace of God is like raising a crop when the rainfall is plentiful. Then, even if the cattle and birds eat it or thieves steal it, the crop will never get exhausted. Wells, lakes and rivers may dry, but not oceans. Similarly, liberation through God is like that. This is extremely rare, but its glory is not understood.
Vaat 1.6
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 6 · Chapter 1 · Verse 6
Moṭāne sevyā hoy ne tenā guṇ āvyā hoy tene desh-kāḷ na lāge, te kenī peṭhe? To jem sūryanī āgaḷ andhāru bheḷu thaīne jāy, paṇ tyā rahevā pāme nahi.
If one has served the great Sadhu and acquired his virtues then adverse circumstances will have no effect on one. This is like the darkness which disappears in the presence of the Sun, but is unable to exist there.
Vaat 1.7
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 7 · Chapter 1 · Verse 7
Bhagwānmā joḍāṇā hoy ne Bhagwānnī āgnāmā rahetā hoy ne Bhagwānnī marjīne jāṇatā hoy evā Sādhu sāthe potānā jīvne bāndhavo; te thakī dharma, gnān, vairāgya, bhakti ane mahimā sahit upāsanā e sarve guṇ pamāy, paṇ te vinā kyāthī pamāy? Ne jevā sādhune seve tevā guṇ āve; te mumukṣhu hoy te paṇ ghaṭī jāy ne pāmar hoy te vadhī jāy, māṭe sarvenu kāraṇ sang chhe.
One should attach one’s jiva to a sadhu who is attached to God, obeys God’s commands and knows God’s wishes. From such a sadhu one can acquire all the virtues of dharma, spiritual knowledge, detachment, devotion and upāsanā along with the knowledge of God’s glory. Apart from him, where else can they be acquired? A person acquires the virtues of the sadhu he serves; even if he is a genuine spiritual aspirant if he is not attached to a God-realized Sadhu, he may regress; and even an evil person may progress if he associates with a genuine Sadhu. Thus, the cause of everything is the company of a great Sadhu.
Vaat 1.8
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 8 · Chapter 1 · Verse 8
Indriyārām hoy te dabāy paṇ ātmārām hoy te na dabāy, kem je, indriyārāmne to sevā karīne ke padārth āpīne paṇ dabāvīe, paṇ ātmārām hoy te shā sāru dabāy? Kem je, ene to kāī joīe ja nahi, ne e to anantne dabāvī de paṇ pote dabāy nahi.
One who is controlled by his senses can be suppressed, but one who is controlled by his ātmā is not. The former is suppressed by serving him or giving him things. But why should the latter be suppressed? For, he does not desire anything. And he can control countless others but he himself is not controlled.
Vaat 1.9
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 9 · Chapter 1 · Verse 9
Sansār mūkīne tyāgī thāy te dukh-mātrane ṭāḷīne sukhiyo thaī jāy, paṇ tyāgī thayā pachhī paṇ vāsanānu dukh rahe chhe. Te vāsanā lobhnī, kāmnī, svādnī, snehnī ne mānnī chhe. Te vāsanā ṭaḷe tem tem sukhiyo thāy chhe.
One who renounces worldly life and becomes a renunciant overcomes all miseries and becomes happy. But even after becoming a renunciant, the misery associated with base instincts – greed, lust, taste, attachments and ego – remains. As these base instincts are (gradually) overcome, one becomes happier.
Vaat 1.10
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 10 · Chapter 1 · Verse 10
Indriyu, antahkaraṇ e sarve kusangī chhe. Te je je viṣhayno jog thāy te te rūp thaī jāy, evo ja e jīvno swabhāv chhe. Te evā jīvne Bhagavānnā sādhu dharma, gnāna, vairāgya, bhakti, mahimā, upāsanā e sarve guṇ āpe chhe.
The senses and inner faculties are all bad company. Since, they become engrossed in the sense pleasures they come into contact with. That is also the nature of the jiva. Such a jiva is given all the virtues of dharma, spiritual knowledge, detachment, devotion, glory of God and upāsanā by God’s holy Sadhu.
Vaat 1.11
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 11 · Chapter 1 · Verse 11
Rūpvān strī, zāzu dravya ne sārī meḍī maḷī te satsangīne paṇ māyānu bandhan thayu. Kem je, emāthī jīv nīkaḷe nahi. Māṭe e to jevu tevu sādhāraṇ maḷe te ja sāru chhe.
Even a satsangi who gets a beautiful wife, plentiful wealth and a good house is said to be in the grip of māyā. Since, a jiva cannot escape from there. Thus, it is good if one attains ordinary things.
Vaat 1.12
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 12 · Chapter 1 · Verse 12
“Doṣh rahe chhe ne ṭaḷī jātā nathī e te kevaḷ doṣh ja chhe ke temā kāī guṇ paṇ chhe? E prashna chhe.” Teno uttar je, “Doṣh pīḍe tethī satsangmā dīn-ādhīn rahevāy, satsangnī garaj rahe ne Bhagwānnī stuti thāy ne doṣhno kajiyo hoy tethī gnān thātu jāy, te vinā evī garaj rahe nahi; māṭe e guṇ chhe.”
When faults (e.g. greed, anger, etc.) remain and are not overcome, does it mean they are merely faults or is there some virtue even in them? That is the question. The answer, “Faults hurt, so one remains meek and humble in Satsang, one retains a need for Satsang and one prays to God. And if one experiences difficulty due to faults, knowledge develops. Without it, such a need does not arise. Therefore, this is a virtue (in a fault).”
Vaat 1.13
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 13 · Chapter 1 · Verse 13
Dehe karīne kriyā karato hoy ne potānu rūp judu samajīne bhajan karato hoy to bahu samās thāy,1 paṇ kriyārūp thaīne temā bhaḷī jāy to ṭhīk nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Puṣhṭi pamāy, poṣhaṇ thāy, āgaḷ vadhāy.
One who does things with his body and offers devotion to God with the understanding that his true form is different from the body (i.e. ātmā) progresses a lot. But if he becomes one with his actions, that is not proper.
Vaat 1.14
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 14 · Chapter 1 · Verse 14
Karoḍ kām bagāḍīne paṇ ek mokṣha sudhārvo ne kadāpi karoḍ kām sudhāryā ne ek mokṣha bagāḍyo to temā shu karyu?
Even by spoiling ten million tasks, improve your moksha. In case ten million tasks are improved, but moksha is spoilt, what is achieved?
Vaat 1.15
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 15 · Chapter 1 · Verse 15
Navadhā bhakti1 ādik sādhane karīne jīv shuddha to thāy chhe, paṇ vāte karīne jevo shuddha thāy evo thato nathī. Māṭe shabda jevu to koī baḷavān nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Parameshvarnī nav prakārnī bhakti: kathā-shravaṇ, guṇ-kīrtan, nām-smaraṇ, pād-sevan, archan (chandan vagerethī pūjan), vandan dāsya (dāspaṇe - gulāmbhāve vartavu), sakhya (mitrabhāv) ane ātmanivedan (sarvaswa arpaṇ karavu, darek kriyāmā Bhagwānne āgaḷ rākhavā).
The jiva is certainly purified through the nine forms of devotion and other endeavours, but not to the extent it is purified by the talks of God’s holy Sadhu. There is nothing as powerful as the words of the Satpurush.
Vaat 1.16
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 16 · Chapter 1 · Verse 16
Shivjī Mohinī swarūpmā moh pāmīne vyākuḷ thaī gayā ne te pachhī antarmā joyu tyāre jāṇyu je, mārā Swāmīnī māyāmā hu moh pāmu emā shu? Em vichār karyo tyāre antarmā shānti thaī gaī. Māṭe desh-kāḷ to lāge kharo paṇ jnyāne karīne tenu dukh maṭe.
Shivji became infatuated with the form of Mohini and lost his senses. Then, he introspected and thought, what is surprising about becoming infatuated with my God’s māyā? He thought this way and felt peace in his heart. Therefore, one may be affected by unfavorable place, time, etc.; but with gnān, one can relieve their misery.
Vaat 1.17
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 17 · Chapter 1 · Verse 17
Bhagwāne kahyu chhe je, “Jevo hu satsange karīne vash thāu chhu evo tap, yagna, yog, vrat, dānādik sādhane karīne paṇ vash nathī thāto.”1 Te satsang shu je, ‘Moṭā Ekāntikne hāth joḍavā ne te kahe tem karavu e ja chhe.’ Footnotes: 1. 1. Shrīmadbhāgavat (11/12/1-2)mā Bhagwān kahe chhe: ‘N rodhayati mām yogo na sānkhyam dharma ev cha; N svādhyāyastapastyāgo neṣhṭāpūrtam na dakṣhiṇā. Vratāni yagnashchhandānsi tīrthāni niyamā yamāhā; Yathāvarundhe satsangah sarvasangāpaho hi mām.’
God has said, “I am not as pleased by austerities, sacrifices, yoga, observance of vows, donations and other endeavours as I am by satsang.” What is that satsang? “To fold one’s hands before the great God-realized Sadhu and to do as he says.”
Vaat 1.18
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 18 · Chapter 1 · Verse 18
Jīv to bahu baḷiyo chhe. Te sāvajnā dehmā āve tyāre kevu baḷ hoy? Eno e jīv jyāre bakarānā dehmā āve tyāre garīb thaī jāy chhe.
The jiva is very powerful. When it is in the body of a lion, how much strength does it have? But when in the body of a sheep, the same jiva becomes meek.
Vaat 1.19
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 19 · Chapter 1 · Verse 19
Karoḍ rūpiyā kharachtā paṇ āvā Sādhu maḷe nahi ne karoḍ rūpiyā detā paṇ ā vātu maḷe nahi ne karoḍ rūpiyā āpatā paṇ manuṣhya-deh maḷe nahi; ne āpaṇe paṇ karoḍ janma dharyā chhe, paṇ koī vakhat āvo jog maḷyo nathī. Nīkar shu karavā deh dharavo paḍe?
Even by spending tens of millions of rupees, such a sadhu is unattainable. Even by giving tens of millions of rupees, such spiritual talks are unattainable. Even by giving tens of millions of rupees, this human body cannot be attained. And we, too, have taken tens of millions of births. But never have we had such company of the God-realized Sadhu. Otherwise why would we have to take birth?
Vaat 1.20
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 20 · Chapter 1 · Verse 20
Mokṣhnā dātā to Bhagwān ne Sādhu e be ja chhe. Ne vairāgya chhe te to viṣhay sāthe ver karāve paṇ Bhagwānnu kām na kare, ne ātmaniṣhṭhā chhe te sarvemāthī prīti toḍāve paṇ Bhagwānnu kām na kare, ne dharma chhe teṇe karīne sukhī rahe paṇ Bhagwānnu kām na kare. Māṭe mokṣhnā dātā to Bhagwān ne Sādhu e be ja chhe māṭe eno avaguṇ na levo.
Only God and his holy Sadhu can grant moksha. Detachment cultivates enmity towards material pleasures but does not do the job of God; ātmā-realization breaks attachment from everything but does not do the job of God; and by dharma one remains happy but it also does not do the job of God. Thus, only God and his holy Sadhu give moksha. Therefore, do not find faults in them.
Vaat 1.21
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 21 · Chapter 1 · Verse 21
Ā to Bhagwāne saunu sāmarthya ḍhānkī rākhyu chhe, nīkar to shāp daīne bāḷī mūke, nīkar gānḍā thaīne kyāynā kyāy chālyā jāy, nīkar hāthe deh mūkīne jātā rahe, paṇ ā to koīnu chālavā detā nathī.
God has suppressed everyone’s powers; otherwise, one would curse someone and burn them, or become mad and go elsewhere, or end their life on their own. But God does not let that happen.
Vaat 1.22
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 22 · Chapter 1 · Verse 22
Bhagwān to potānā bhaktanī rakṣhā karavāmā ja beṭhā chhe. Kenī peṭhe? To jem pāpaṇ ānkhanī rakṣhā kare chhe ne hāth kanṭhanī rakṣhā kare chhe ne māvatar chhokarānī rakṣhā kare chhe ne rājā prajānī rakṣhāmā chhe, tem ja Bhagwān āpaṇī rakṣhāmā chhe.
God is ever ready to protect his devotees. How? Just as eyelids protect the eyes, hands protect the neck, a mother protects her child and a king protects his subjects, God protects us.
Vaat 1.23
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 23 · Chapter 1 · Verse 23
“Bhagwān keṭalākne samṛuddhi āpe chhe ne keṭalākne nathī āpatā, tenu kem samajavu? E prashna chhe.” Teno uttar je, “Zāzu dhan maḷe to vadhāre fel1 kare, māṭe thoḍu maḷe te ṭhīk chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Bin-jarūrī upbhog.
God gives wealth to some and not to others. How should this be understood? That is the question. The answer, “With excessive wealth, one indulges more in worldly enjoyment (and needless expenditure). Thus, it is proper that one gets less.”
Vaat 1.24
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 24 · Chapter 1 · Verse 24
Pāch-das vār ‘Swāminārāyaṇ, Swāminārāyaṇ’ nām jāṇye ajāṇye leshe tenu paṇ āpaṇe kalyāṇ karavu paḍashe ne ākhā brahmānḍne satsang karāvavo chhe.
We will also have to redeem one who, knowingly or unknowingly, says ‘Swaminarayan, Swaminarayan’ five to ten times. And we want to extend satsang throughout the universe.
Vaat 1.25
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 25 · Chapter 1 · Verse 25
Jeṭalu kāī māyāmay sukh chhe te sarve dukh vinānu hoy nahi, e vāt paṇ ek jāṇī rākhavī.
Whatever happiness exists in māyā is not without misery. This, too, should be kept in mind.
Vaat 1.26
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 26 · Chapter 1 · Verse 26
Viṣhaynu je sukh chhe te karatā ātmānu sukh bahu adhik chhe ne te karatā Bhagwānnu sukh e to chintāmaṇi1 chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Je māgīe te prāpt karāve evu ek divya ratna.
Much greater than the enjoyment of material pleasures is the bliss of the ātmā and even better is the bliss of God, which is like the chintāmani.
Vaat 1.27
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 27 · Chapter 1 · Verse 27
Ek jaṇe lākh rūpiyānī buddhi līdhī,1 tem ja mokṣhanī buddhi paṇ anek prakārnī moṭā thakī shikhāy chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Rājkuvar ane pradhānputra ek jangalmā rāt rokāyā. Savāre pradhānputra bājunā nagarmā khāvānu levā gayo. Dvār ūghaḍtā sudhī besī rahyo. Nasībjoge tyāno rājā nirvansha marī gayo hato tethī rājgādī māṭe prajāe nakkī karelu ke, “Savārnā darvājā ūghaḍtā nagarmā pahelo dākhal thāy tene rājā banāvavo.” Ām, pradhānputrane rājgādī maḷī. Ā bāju rājkuvar mitranī rāh joī thākyo. Te shodhato e ja nagarmā āvī chaḍyo. Bajārmā ek dukān par lakhelu ke ‘Ahī buddhi vechāy chhe.’ Te andar gayo. Sheṭhane kimmat pūchhī. Sheṭh kahe, “Ekthī lākh rūpiyā sudhīnī buddhi ahī maḷe chhe.” Tarat rājkuvar ek lākhnī vīṭī kāḍhī āpī ne buddhi māgī. Sheṭhe lakhī āpyu, “Āpṇāthī nāno hoy ane tene adhikār maḷyo hoy to tene namī devu.” Rājkumāre ā vākya gokhī nākhyu. Te āgaḷ chālyo. Evāmā pradhānputranī rājsavārī nīkaḷī. Te ūnchā hāthī par beṭho hato. Rājkumāre tene joyo. Pahelā to sahej krodh chaḍhyo, paṇ pelu vākya yād āvyu ne te tarat namī paḍyo. Pradhānputrane tene salām bharato joyo. Pachhī rāj darbārmā āvī teṇe prajāmat laī potānā hukamthī rājkuvarne gādīe besāḍyo. Pote pradhān banīne rahyo.
A person bought wisdom for 100,000 rupees.1 Similarly, wisdom of the many ways for moksha can be learnt from the God-realized Sadhu. Footnotes: 1. 1. A prince and a minister’s son, who were friends, left for another village. On the way they spent the night in a jungle. Both were hungry in the morning. The prince told his friend to get some food from the nearby town. The minister’s son went to the town but the gates of the town were closed. It so happened that the town’s king had died, childless. The subjects had decided that whoever entered first on opening the gates of the town should be made the king. When the gates opened, the minister’s son entered first and thus he was proclaimed king. Meanwhile, the prince who was tired of the long wait, set out in search of his friend. He came to the town where he read a board in a shop front, ‘For Sale – Intellect.’ Out of curiosity, he entered the shop and asked the price of intellect. The shop owner replied, “It ranges from one rupee to one hundred thousand rupees.” The prince then gave a jewelled ring valued at one hundred thousand rupees and asked for wisdom (intellect). “One should bow even to one’s junior in case he is raised to a position of power.” The shop owner wrote this on a piece of paper and handed it over to the prince. The prince learnt the wise statement by heart and continued his search. A king’s procession was passing by so he stood aside. When the procession came near, the prince saw that the king sitting on the elephant was none other than his friend, the minister’s son. At first he felt angry with him, but on remembering the words on the note, he bowed down and saluted the new king. The minister’s son noted that his friend was paying obeisance to him. On returning to the royal palace he summoned the court and declared to the assembly, “Now that I am the king, I can act according to my wishes.” So, he called for his friend, the prince, and handed over the royal throne to him. The prince was thus counselled at the cost of one hundred thousand rupees and acquired the royal throne. Similarly, from the holy Sadhu we gain the wisdom by which moksha can be attained. For this, we should keep close contact of a God-realized Sadhu. Then only can we succeed in attaining the divine abode, just as the prince succeeded in getting the kingdom.
Vaat 1.28
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 28 · Chapter 1 · Verse 28
Hīro chhe te koī rīte fūṭe nahi paṇ te mākaḍnā lohīthī fūṭe. Tem vāsanā koī rīte ṭaḷe nahi paṇ moṭā kahe tem kare, teno guṇ āve ne enī kriyā game to tethī ṭaḷe; nīkar sādhan to Saubhari ādiknā kevā?1 To paṇ vāsanā ṭaḷī nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Saubhari nāmnā ṛuṣhie Bhagwānne prāpta karavā māṭe jaḷmā ūbhā rahīne sāṭh hajār varṣh tap karelu, paṇ ek vār māchhalā-māchhalīnu maithun joyu ke tene paraṇvāno vichār thayo ane trīs hajār varṣhanā tapnā badalāmā yauvan kharīdyu. Tenā rūpne joī Māndhātā Rājānī pachāse pachās kuvarīo varī. Bījā trīs hajār varṣhanu tap mūkī vaibhav ne samṛuddhi vasāvyā. Chhevaṭe viṣhaysukh nāshvant ne dukhnu kāraṇ chhe evu gnān thatā vanmā gayā ne strīo sahit tap karī mokṣhane pāmyā. (Bhāgwat: 9/6/38)
It is said that a diamond cannot be cut in any way, except by using the blood of a bed bug. Similarly, desires cannot be destroyed in any way except by doing what the great (Sadhu) instructs, imbibing his virtues and admiring his actions. Otherwise, how great were the endeavours of Saubhari1 and others? Yet, their desires were not overcome. Footnotes: 1. 1. Saubhari rishi performed austerities for 60,000 years by standing in water. One day he saw two fish mating and his latent desire was awakened. He exchanged the fruits of 30,000 years of his austerities for a young, handsome form and then married the 50 daughters of King Mandhata. The other 30,000 years he exchanged for material wealth. Finally, though, he realized that material pleasures were perishable and a cause of misery. Thus, he again began performing austerities and attained moksha, with his wives.
Vaat 1.29
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 29 · Chapter 1 · Verse 29
Satsang thāy paṇ sang vinā satsangnu sukh na āve, kenī peṭhe? To jem khādhānu maḷe paṇ khādhā vinā sukh na āve, jem lūgḍā-ghareṇā maḷe to paṇ pe’ryā vinā tenu sukh na āve, tem sang vinā satsangnu sukh āve nahi.
One can attain Satsang, but without close association, there is no happiness. How? It is like a person having food, but without actually eating there is no happiness. Also, one may have clothes but without wearing them there is no happiness. Similarly, without the association of the great Sadhu, one does not get the bliss of Satsang.
Vaat 1.30
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 30 · Chapter 1 · Verse 30
Āvā Sādhune manmā sambhārīe to mannā pāp baḷī jāy ne vātu sāmbhaḷīe to kānnā pāp baḷī jāy ne darshan karīe to ānkhnā pāp baḷī jāy, em mahimā jāṇavo.
Remembering this Sadhu in the mind destroys the sins of the mind; listening to his talks destroys the sins of the ears; and engaging in his darshan destroys the sins of the eyes. Understand his glory in this way.
Vaat 1.31
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 31 · Chapter 1 · Verse 31
Āthī karoḍ gaṇo satsang thāshe ne āthī karoḍ gaṇā mandir thāshe paṇ ā vātu ne ā kathā nahi maḷe ne vahevār pradhān thaī jāshe, māṭe saheje saheje karavu; ne ā kārkhānā1 to brahmānḍ raheshe tyā sudhī chālashe, māṭe kathā-vārtā karavā-sāmbhaḷavāno abhyās rākhavo, ne āpaṇe to dharma, gnāna, vairāgya, bhakti e chāre vāt rākhavī paṇ ek ja mukhya na karavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mandirmā thatī bāndhakām ādi pravṛutti māṭe vaprāto shabda.
Satsang will grow ten million-fold and there will be ten million times more mandirs, but these talks and discourses will not be attained again and administrative duties will predominate. Therefore, only do that which comes naturally. These workshops (for building mandirs, pilgrim resthouses, etc.) will continue as long as the universe remains. So, cultivate the practice of listening to and giving spiritual discourses. We should aspire for all four spiritual endeavours – dharma, spiritual wisdom, detachment and bhakti – and not keep just one as predominant.
Vaat 1.32
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 32 · Chapter 1 · Verse 32
Tyāg, vairāgya, niyam ne dharmanī keṭalīk vāt karīne bolyā je, “Tyāg, vairāgyane shu karavā chhe? Game evo jīv hashe paṇ Bhagwānnā bhaktamā ātmabuddhi1 e ja satsangī chhe ne te vinā to game teṭalī bhakti kare to paṇ shu? Ne kṛupāe karī akhanḍ mūrti dekhe to paṇ shu? Māṭe Bhagwānnā bhaktamā ātmabuddhi e ja satsang chhe. Ne satsang to rātripralay2 sudhī karashu tyāre thāshe, pachhī tene desh-kāḷ nahi lāge evo satsang karavo chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Potāpaṇānī bhāvanā. 2. Virāṭ Brahmānī ek rātri thatā Trilokno nāsh thāy te.
After talking on renunciation, detachment, observance of rules and dharma, Swami said, “What is one to do with renunciation and detachment? Whatever the type of jiva, only one who has profound association with the enlightened Sadhu of God is a satsangi. Without this, what is the use even if one offers much devotion? And so what even if he can, through grace, continuously see the murti? Only profound association with the enlightened Sadhu of God is satsang. This satsang is attained by continuously practicing it until the very end of the entire universe. Then, he will not be affected by adverse circumstances. So, do such satsang.”
Vaat 1.33
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 33 · Chapter 1 · Verse 33
Ā vātumāthī to brahmarūp thavāshe ne bāḷ, joban ne vṛuddha e traṇ prakārnī striyu, ne kacharo ne kanchan e sarve sarakhu thaī jāshe ne kāī dīṭhu nahi game evu thāshe. Tyāre kahesho je, vātu sāmbhaḷīe chhīe ne kem thātu nathī? Te to āj āmbo vāve ne kāle kerī kem thāy? Paṇ e ja āmbo dash varasno thāy tyāre emāthī keriyu thāy chhe. Em thāvānu chhe.
One can become brahmarup through these talks. Then there will be an equal attitude towards young and old women, dust and gold – and one will not even like to look at these. You may say, “We listen to these talks, yet why does this not happen to us?” But if you plant a mango sapling today, how can mangoes grow by tomorrow? But ten years later that mango tree will give mangoes. This is what happens.
Vaat 1.34
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 34 · Chapter 1 · Verse 34
Āpaṇe tapās karavo je, hajār rūpiyā maḷe tenu shu faḷ chhe ne lākh rūpiyā maḷe tenu shu faḷ chhe ne karoḍ rūpiyā maḷe tenu shu faḷ chhe? Kem je, roṭalāthī to vadhāre khavātu nathī. Māṭe teno tapās karavo ne pāchhā vaḷavā shīkhavu.
We should think, “What is the benefit of getting 100 rupees or 100,000 rupees or 10 million rupees? Since we cannot eat more than a limited amount of food. Think thus and learn to step back from indulgence.”
Vaat 1.35
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 35 · Chapter 1 · Verse 35
Āloḍya sarva-shāstrāṇi vichārya cha punah punah; Idam-ekam suniṣhpannam dhyeyo Nārāyaṇo Harihi.1 E shlokmā Vyāsjīe sarva shāstrano siddhānt kahyo chhe je, ‘Bhagwānno āsharo karavo,’ tem ja ame tapās karyo je, ‘Sarvano siddhānt sādhuno sanga ja chhe.’ Footnotes: 1. 1. Veda-Vedāntādi sakaḷ shāstronu manthan karīne vāramvār vichār karyā bād ek vastunu ja sārī rīte niṣhpanna - tāraṇ karī shakyo chhu, te e chhe ke Shrī Hari evā Nārāyaṇ Bhagwān dhyān-bhakti karavā yogya chhe. - Bhagwān Ved Vyās (Ling Purāṇ: 7/11/2)
Ālodya sarva shāstrāni, vichārya cha punaha punaha, Idamekam sunishpannam dhyeyo Narayano Harihi. (Lingpuran 7/11/2) “After pondering over all the scriptures, I have distilled one thought from them: God is worthy of our devotion.” In this shlok, Vyasji has revealed the essence of all the scriptures: “Take refuge in God. Similarly, I have found that the essence of everything is close association with a Sadhu.”
Vaat 1.36
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 36 · Chapter 1 · Verse 36
Sarva karatā Lakṣhmījīnī samajaṇ1 adhik kahī, kem je, tene Bhagwānmā nirdoṣh-buddhi, to paṇ temā strīno bhāv kharo. Māṭe te karatā Uddhavjīnī samajaṇ2 adhik chhe, kem je, Uddhavjī gnānī ne tene Bhagavānmā nirdoṣhpaṇu; paṇ tene ghar mūktā kaṭhaṇ paḍyu. Māṭe te karatā paṇ Jaḍ-Bharatnī ne Shukjīnī samajaṇ3 adhik, kem je, ene strī-puruṣh evo bhāv ja nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanī āṭh paṭarāṇīomā Rukmiṇī arthāt Lakṣhmījīne Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa viṣhe Bhagwānpaṇāno bhāv hato. Bījī paṭarāṇīone risāmaṇā - manāmaṇā thatā paṇ Rukmiṇīne Bhagwānmā nirdoṣh-buddhi hatī. Eṭale ja Rukmiṇīnā prītinā puṣhpathī Kṛuṣhṇa toḷāyā. Satyabhāmāe Kṛuṣhṇanī bhārobhār sonu mūkyu chhatā nahotā toḷāyā. Chhatā Lakṣhmījīmā strīno bhāv Vyāsjīe ullekhyo chhe. Kṛuṣhṇe temanu haraṇ karyu tyāre temano bhāī Rukmī Kṛuṣhṇane pakaḍī māravā senā laī pāchhaḷ paḍyo. Yuddha thayu. Tyāre Rukmīne māravā tatpar thayelā Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane Rukmiṇī kahe chhe, “E māro bhāī chhe, tene na mārasho, he Jagatpati! Tamane vīnavu chhu...” Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe tene mithyā moh chhoḍī devā updesh dīdho. Chhatā dehānt-danḍ na karavā vīnavyā eṭale Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe Rukmīnu māthu ane mūchho mūnḍāvī nankhāvyā ne pachhī chhoḍī mūkyo. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 10/52-53) 2. Mathurāmā Kubjāne gher Bhagwān Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa padhāryā ne Uddhavne ghar bahār chokī karavā rākhyā, tyāre Uddhavne sahej paṇ sanshay na thayo ke Bhagwāne ek kūbaḍī strī sāthe ekāntvās kem sevyo? Bhagwān to agni jevā nirlep chhe. Evu Uddhavne gnān hatu ne temanāmā sadā nirdoṣh-buddhi hatī. Chhatā potānu avatār-kārya pūru karī līlā sankelvānī taiyārī karatā Bhagwān Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe Uddhavjīne kahyu, “Have Dvārkā ḍūbī jashe ne pralay thashe. Māṭe ghar mūkī sanyās laī besī māru bhajan karaje.” Vāramvār ā bhāvanī āgnā Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe karī chhatā chhek sudhī sanshay-rahit teo na thayā. Agiyārmā Skandhamā 29 adhyāy sudhī gnān āpyu tyāre Badrikāshram javā taiyār thayā. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 11/7) 3. Trījā draṣhṭāntmā Jaḍbharat ane Shukjīnī samajaṇ Rukmiṇī ane Uddhavjī karatā shreṣhṭh gaṇī, kāraṇ ke bannee sansārnu yathārth swarūp jāṇī līdhā bād Bhagwānmā sneh karyo hato. Hruṣhabhdev Bhagwānnā putra Bharatjī ākhī pṛuthvīnu rāj mūkī vanmā Bhagwān bhajavā gayā ane mṛuglīnā bachchāmā āsakti thavāthī enu bandhan thayu. Tap, yog, dhyān, bhakti bāju par rahyā. Antkāḷe mṛugmay thavāthī mṛugno avatār temane āvyo. Pūrva-janmanu gnān hoī deh pāḍī dīdho ne mūrkh brāhmaṇrūpe (Jaḍbharat nāme) gānḍānī jem ja rahyā. Jethī kyāy bandhan na thāy. Ek vār Jaḍbharatne Bhīloe pakaḍyā ne Bhadrakāḷī sāme balidān devā laī gayā. Ek Bhīl Jaḍbharatnā māthā upar khaḍg toḷīne ūbho rahyo, chhatā mṛutyuno lesh paṇ ḍar rākhyā vinā teo sthitpragna bhāve ūbhā chhe, kāraṇ ke teo ātmārūpe potāne mānatā hatā. Bhadrakāḷī pragaṭ thayā ne Bhīlono nāsh karī Jaḍbharatnī rakṣhā karī. Shukdevjīne strī-puruṣh evo bhed nahoto. Ek vār sarovarmā devānganāo nirvastra snān karī rahī hatī. Shukjī tyāthī pasār thayā paṇ strīoe vastra dhāraṇ na karyā. Pāchhaḷ Vyāsjī thoḍā samay pachhī tyāthī pasār thayā ne e strīoe zaṭpaṭ doḍīne vastra paherī līdhā. Vyāsjīne ānu rahasya na samajāyu. Strīone pūchhatā jaṇāvyu, “Tavāsti stripumbhidā na tu sutasya viviktadraṣhṭehe.” - Strī-puruṣh evo bhed tamāre chhe paṇ Shukjīne nathī.
Among all, Lakshmiji’s understanding is superior, because she perceived God as without faults.1 However, she still considered herself as a woman. Therefore, Uddhavji’s understanding is greater because he was wise (gnāni) and perceived God as innocent. However, he had difficulty leaving his home.2 Ultimately, Jadbharat’s and Shukji’s understanding is the best because they are aloof of the distinction of male and female.3 Footnotes: 1. 1. Among the chief queens of Krishna Bhagwan, Rukmini was the avatār of Lakshmiji. She understood Krishna as God. The other queens would take offense and would have to be pleased. Rukmini, on the other hand, perceived all actions of Krishna as innocent. When Krishna was being weighed on a balance, Satyabhāmā placed gold, yet the gold could not equal the weight of Krishna. Rukmini placed flowers on the scale and the scale lifted up because of her love. Nevertheless, Vyās Bhagwan has revealed Lakshmiji’s understanding. When Krishna abducted her (with her consent), her brother Rukmi chased Krishna to kill him. Krishna and Rukmi fought and Krishna raised his sword to sever his head. Rukmini pleaded with Krishna and said, “He is my brother. Do not kill him. I beseech you, O Lord of all.” Krishna told her to let go of her false attachment, yet she pleaded not to punish him with death. Therefore, Krishna shaved his head and mustache and let him go. Swami says Rukmini considered herself as a woman, implying that she did not possess firm ātma-nishthā, for the ātmā is neither male nor female. (Shrimad Bhagwat: 10/52-53) 2. In Mathurā, Krishna Bhagwan blessed Kubjā’s home. Uddhavji was with Krishna and Krishna asked him to stay at the door to guard the home. Uddhavji had no doubts of Krishna being alone in a house with a woman. Uddhavji had the knowledge that Krishna is God who is forever innocent in all his actions. Nevertheless, when Krishna’s purpose of incarnating on the earth ended and he was determined to return to his abode, he said to Uddhavji, “Now, Dvarika will drown in the ocean. Therefore, renounce your home and worship me.” Krishna gave this order several times, yet he could not accept these words and had difficulty renouncing his home till the end. After Krishna gave him the knowledge mentioned in the Bhagwat (Skandh 11, Adhyay 7-29), then he prepared to go to Badrikashram. 3. In this third example, Swami says Jadbharat’s and Shukji’s understanding is greater than Rukmini’s and Uddhavji’s understanding. The reason is that they understood the nature of the world thoroughly (and developed detachment from it) and developed love for God. Rushabhdev Bhagwan’s son Bharatji renounced the rule of the whole earth and left for the forest to worship God. However, he became attached to a deer and strayed from his devotion to God. He died with the deer in his mind and became a deer in his next life. He retained knowledge of his past life and committed suicide. He was reborn as Jadbharat. He behaved as a foolish man so that he does not become bound to anyone by love. Once, some tribal people captured him to sacrifice his body to their deity. One tribal man was ready to cut his head off, yet Jadbharat stood there fearlessly because he believed his self to be the ātmā. Bhadrakāli Devi appeared and killed the tribe to save Jadbharat. Shukdevji had no distinction of male or female. Once, heavenly maidens were bathing in a lake. Shukji passed by but the women did not put their clothes on. Vyasji passed by later and the women put their clothes on. Vyasji asked them the reason. They said, “Tavāsti stripumbhidā na tu sutasya viviktadraṣhṭehe.” (You have the perception of male and female but Shukji does not.)
Vaat 1.37
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 37 · Chapter 1 · Verse 37
Kalp1 ākho sudhī Bhagwānnī sāmu joīne besī rahe to paṇ niṣhedh karyā vinā viṣhay to na ṭaḷe; ne sādhu maḷe to ṭāḷe ne nirvikalp samādhi thāy to paṇ viṣhay na ṭaḷe; ne gnānnī samādhi thāy to ṭaḷe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jagatnā āyuṣhyano kāḷ. Jagatnī utpattithī mānḍīne teno nāsh thāy tyā sudhīno vakhat. Brahmāno ahorātri ek divas. Kṛut, tretā, dvāpar ne kali ā chār yugnī chokaḍī evī ek hajār chokaḍī jeṭalo kāḷ. Āṭh abaj chosaṭh varṣhono samay. Brahmānā ek divasmā swargamā chaud Indra ane pṛuthvī upar chaud Manu vīte chhe. Trilokī nāsh pāme chhe. Swāmīnī ā vātne vadhu puṣhṭ karavā māṭe juo Vachanāmṛut: Bhūgoḷ-Khagoḷnu.
Even if one sits in front of God and looks at him for one kalp,1 one will not become detached from the vishays without falsifying them.2 If one attains the company of the Sadhu, then he can detach one from the vishays. Even the experience of nirvikalp samādhi will not cause one to detach from them. However, if one attains the gnān samādhi, then one can detach from the vishays.3 Footnotes: 1. 1. A kalp is one day of Virat-Brahmā from his day to night. This equal 4,320,000,000 human years. 2. Here, Swami is explaining that without actively falsifying the vishays through the firm thought process of Sankhya along with renouncing the vishays, one cannot overcome the weakness for enjoying them. 3. Here, Swami explains that if one experiences samādhi by mastering Ashtāng Yog, one will still have cravings for enjoying the vishays. Therefore, one needs gnān - understanding the temporary nature of the world, understanding one’s true form as the ātmā and understanding of God’s form and his greatness. This gnān is only attained by the association of the Aksharbrahman Satpurush.
Vaat 1.38
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 38 · Chapter 1 · Verse 38
Antahkaraṇrūp māyāno kajiyo bahu bhāre chhe. Kem je Bharatjīne kevo vairāgya ane keṭalu rājya mūkyu! To paṇ vighna thayu. Saubhari1 ne Parāshar2 ādik kevā! Tene paṇ dhakkā lāgyā. Māṭe Sādhu gnān āpīne janma āpe chhe ne niṣhedh kare tyāre e kajiyo maṭe chhe paṇ te vinā maṭato nathī. Ne ākhī unmar Bhagwānnī bheḷā rahe to paṇ gnān vinā kasar ṭaḷe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bharatjī ane Saubhari māṭe anukram juo Swāmīnī Vāt: 1/36 ane 1/28. 2. Ek ṛuṣhi. Shakti Rhuṣhi ane Adrashyantīnā putra. Temane pandar hajār shiṣhya hatā. Ā Maharṣhi jyotiṣh, gaṇit, bījgaṇit ane naukāshāstramā ghaṇā pravīṇ ne shodhak hatā. Ek vār teo nadī pār karavā taṭ par beṭhā hatā. Hoḍīonī āvan-jāvan bandh thaī hatī. Ek Satyavatī nāmanī māchhīkanyā ṛuṣhine sāme pār laī javā taiyār thaī. Ekāntnā mādak vātāvaraṇmā ṛuṣhie Satyavatī sāthe Gandharva vivāh karyo ne tenāthī Bhagwān Kṛuṣhṇa Dvaipāyan Vyāsnī utpatti thaī.
The strife due to māyā in the form of the inner faculties is very burdensome. See, Bharatji had such detachment and renounced his kingdom, yet he encountered difficulties. How great were Saubhari,1 Parashar2 and others. Yet, even they suffered. Thus, a Sadhu gives spiritual knowledge and (a new) life. When he prohibits indulgence in material pleasures, strife is resolved, but not otherwise. Even if one lives a whole lifetime with God, without spiritual knowledge, faults are not overcome. Footnotes: 1. 1. Saubhari rishi performed austerities for 60,000 years by standing in water. One day he saw two fish mating and his latent desire was awakened. He exchanged the fruits of 30,000 years of his austerities for a young, handsome form and then married the 50 daughters of King Mandhata. The other 30,000 years he exchanged for material wealth. Finally, though, he realized that material pleasures were perishable and a cause of misery. Thus, he again began performing austerities and attained moksha, along with his wives. (Footnote 1, Vat 5.3 - English version; Vat 1-28 - Gujarati version) 2. Parashar was the son of rishi Shakti and goddess Adrashyanti. He was the guru of 15,000 disciples. He was a master in astrology, mathematics, calculus and boat-making. One full moon night he wanted to cross the Ganga. All the boatmen had stopped for the night. But the daughter of one boatman, Satyavati, agreed to take him across. Parashar was struck by her beauty and was overcome by passion. He married her in the Gandharva tradition. In time, she gave birth to Krishna Dvaipayan Vyas.
Vaat 1.39
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 39 · Chapter 1 · Verse 39
Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne temā vāt karī je, “Kadāpi Bhagwānnī mūrtimā joḍāī jāy to paṇ keṭaluk chokhkhu kem samajāy? Māṭe sarva karatā samajaṇ adhik chhe; pachhī nāḍiyu taṇāo ke na taṇāo. Ane sānkhya ne yog karatā paṇ Bhagwānnu sarvoparipaṇu samajavu te shreṣhṭh chhe.”
After reading the Vachanamrut, Swami spoke, “Even if one becomes united with the murti of God (in samādhi), how much clarity of understanding will one have? So, understanding is superior to all, whether or not one can control one’s pulse by yogic powers. And even greater than Sānkhya and Yoga is to understand God as supreme.”
Vaat 1.40
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 40 · Chapter 1 · Verse 40
Mahārāje kahyu hatu je, “Ame Alaiyā gāmmā ek vār draṣhṭi karīne anant jīvne brahma-maholmā1 mūkī dīdhā paṇ tyā koī rahyā nahi.” Māṭe gnān daīne jevu thāy evu draṣhṭie karīne thatu nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Samādhi dvārā.
Maharaj had said, “Once in Alaiya village, countless jivas were sent to Badrikashram by my grace, but none remained there (due to lack of spiritual knowledge).” Thus, that which is achieved through spiritual wisdom is not possible through grace.
Vaat 1.41
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 41 · Chapter 1 · Verse 41
Premīnu het to ṭākānā pāṇī jevu chhe ane gnānīnu het to pātāḷnā pāṇī jevu chhe; ne premīnu to Bhagwān tathā Sādhune rākhavu paḍe, paṇ gnānīnu rākhavu paḍe nahi.
The devotion of one who is affectionate is (shallow) like water in a tank, while the devotion of one who is spiritually wise is (deep) like the water of an artesian well. God and his Sadhu have to look after the affectionate (to keep them in Satsang), but not the spiritually wise.
Vaat 1.42
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 42 · Chapter 1 · Verse 42
Koīk lobh mūke, svād mūke, sneh mūke, mān mūke, paṇ strī to haiyāmāthī nīkaḷe nahi. Ne rūp jevu to kāī baḷavān nathī ne e viṣhay to jīvmātramā rahyo chhe. Te to moṭā anugrah kare tyāre ṭaḷe paṇ te vinā ṭaḷe nahi.
Some overcome greed, some taste, some attachment, some ego but the desire for women remains in the heart. There is nothing as powerful as beauty and this carnal desire resides in all jivas. It is overcome only with the blessings of the great Sadhu, otherwise it is not.
Vaat 1.43
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 43 · Chapter 1 · Verse 43
Ame tapāsī joyu to ā jīv koī divas Bhagwānne mārge chālyo nathī ne sāv navo ādar chhe. Jīv-mātrane khāvu, strī ne dhan e traṇnu ja chintavan chhe ne enu manan ne enī ja kathā ne enu ja kīrtan ne enī ja vātu ne enu ja dhyān chhe. Ne temā paṇ dravyanu to ek manuṣhya jātimā ja chhe. Bākī khāvu ne strī e benu to jīv-mātrane chintavan chhe, kem je Bhagwānnī māyāno fer chaḍāvī mūkyo chhe. Ne enu chintavan na thāy e to devno paṇ dev chhe, e manuṣhya nathī. Ne khāvu, strī ne ūnghavu e traṇ vātmā guru karavā paḍatā nathī. Nadiyunā pravāh samudra sanmukh chāle chhe, em jīvne viṣhay sanmukh chālavāno ḍhāḷ chhe ne temāthī pāchhu vaḷāya e to Sādhunu chhe.
I have analysed and found that the jiva has never walked the path of God. This is a totally new venture for it. All jivas constantly think only of eating, women and wealth. This is all they think about, talk about, sing about, discuss and meditate on. And wealth is peculiar only to the human race. But eating and females are desired by all species, since God has set the wheel of māyā in motion. But one who does not desire this is a god of the gods, he is not human. And for eating, women and sleeping, one does not need a teacher. Rivers flow towards the ocean. Similarly, the jiva is inclined towards enjoying the sense pleasures. To turn back from this is the path of a sadhu.
Vaat 1.44
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 44 · Chapter 1 · Verse 44
Ā dehmā ane ā lokmā āpaṇe choṭashu to Bhagwān choṭavā nahi de. Jem Ravajī Suthārne strī paraṇāvīne sansāranu sukh levā dīdhu nahi ne pachhī sansārmāthī toḍīne chhellī vāre sādhu karyo.1 Em Bhagwān bandhāvā nahi de. Footnotes: 1. 1. Kachchh-Bhujnā Ravajī Suthār Shrījī Mahārājnā bhakta hatā. Teo vidhur thayā tyāre Shrījī Mahārāje temane bīju lagna karavā nā kahelī. Chhatā temaṇe Mahārājne khūb vinantī karī. Tethī farī lagna karāvī āpyā. Bāī Mahārājnī param bhakta hatī. Tethī Shrījī Mahārāj bāīne kahe chhe, “Bījāne ek Jampurī ne tāre māthe be, kāraṇ ke mārā bhaktane te moh pamāḍyo chhe.” Pachhī e bāīe kṣhamā māgī tyāre Shrījī Mahārāj tene upāy batāvatā kahe, “Ravajī kahe tenāthī ūndhu ja karavu. Tenī āsakti toḍavā māṭe.” Patnīnā āvā viparīt valaṇthī dhīre dhīre Ravajī Suthār kanṭāḷī gayā. Chhevaṭe Mahārāje bāīnā dehmā bhayankar rog mūkyo. Tenī shushrūṣhā karī karīne Ravajī Suthārne sansār pratye taddan nafarat thaī gaī. Ante Shrījī Mahārāje temane vāsanā-mukta karī tyāgīnī dīkṣhā āpī hatī.
Even if we want to become attached to this body and this world, God will not allow us to. Just as Ravji Suthar1 was allowed to marry but not allowed to enjoy marital life. And then his ties with worldly life were broken and he became a sadhu. Similarly, God will not allow us to become bound to worldly ties. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ravji Suthar was a staunch devotee of Bhagwan Swaminarayan who lived in Kutch. His wife passed away and Maharaj told him not to remarry. However, Ravji repeatedly requested permission to remarry and eventually Maharaj, reluctantly, gave permission. Then he called Ravji’s wife, who was also a devout follower, and said, “Other sinners will suffer the misery of one hell, but you will suffer the misery of two hells because you have attracted my devotee.” Ravji’s wife asked for pardon and so Maharaj told her what to do. “Do the opposite of whatever Ravji says.” So she did and Ravji became very frustrated. Thereafter his wife fell very ill and he spent all his time, money and energy to nurse her, but she died. Bhagwan Swaminarayan thus liberated him from worldly desires and initiated him into the sadhu-fold.
Vaat 1.45
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 45 · Chapter 1 · Verse 45
Dehmā rogādik dukh āvī paḍe te to tenā mokalnārā ṭāḷe tyāre ṭaḷe paṇ bījā koīthī ṭaḷe nahi. Jem rājāno moklelo mosal1 āve te to tenī chiṭhṭhī āve tyāre ūṭhe paṇ gāmnā māṇasthī ūṭhe nahi, em samajvu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sarakār-adālatno hukam bajāvnār sipāī.
The body is subject to illness and other miseries. They are overcome when God cures them. No one else can do so. Just as one responds to a soldier carrying the king’s orders, but not to an ordinary man of the village.
Vaat 1.46
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 46 · Chapter 1 · Verse 46
Viṣhayno tiraskār to Akṣhardhāmmā, Shvetdvīpmā, Badrikāshrammā ne ā lokmā Moṭā Ekāntik pāse chhe. E chār ṭhekāṇā vinā bākī sarve ṭhekāṇe viṣhayno ādar chhe.
Material pleasures are condemned in Akshardham, Shvetdwip, Badrikashram1 and in the presence of a great God-realized Sadhu in this world. Apart from these four places, everywhere else, material pleasures are respected. Footnotes: 1. 1. The abode of Nar-Narayan Dev, located in the Himalayas.
Vaat 1.47
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 47 · Chapter 1 · Verse 47
Bhagwānnu dhām Guṇātīt chhe ne jīvne guṇātīt karavā chhe ne āpaṇe ā gnān sāmbhaḷyu chhe te bīje kyāī banashe nahī ne āpaṇāthī bīje na rahevāy; ne ā maḷyā chhe te paṇ mūke evā nathī, evu ene āvaḍe chhe. Ne ājanu gnān sāmbhaḷīne jāy chhe tene Shvetdvīp ne tenī ānī kornā koī pūgtā nathī. Ane ā gnān to firangīnī topu1 jevu chhe ne ānī āgaḷ bījānu gnān to faṭākiyā jevu chhe, ne ā to kahyu chhe je, ‘Jannā avaguṇne Nāth gaṇatā nathī re, sharaṇe āvyānā Shyām sujāṇ’ evā chhe. E prakāre mahimā bahu kahyo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Porchugīz loko laḍāīmā top foḍatā te anekno kachcharghāṇ nīkaḷto. 2. Bhāvārtha: bhagavān jīvanā avaguṇ jotā nathī, je koī sharaṇe āve tenā te thaī jāya chhe. (bhagavān kalyāṇano udār sankalpa laīne āvyā chhe ane guṇa-avaguṇ joyā vagar āshritanun kalyāṇ kare chhe.) kīrtana ā avasar re dayāḷu dayā karī re, ṭāḷavāne janmamaraṇanā tāpa, vāhane chaḍīne re āvo chho mārā vā'lamā re, nārāyaṇ nāmano japatā jāpa... ā avasar 1 anekane āvyā re anta same teḍavā re, sāthe laī santa janano sātha, evā to tamārā re guṇ ananta pār re, sānbhaḷatāmān sarave thāya sanātha... ā avasar 2 adhamanī jāti re odhārī bahu nārī, ne jene ninde shāstra ved purāṇa, guṇ ne avaguṇ re nāth gaṇatā nathī re, sharaṇe āvyānā shyām sujāṇa... ā avasar 3 karuṇārasane pragaṭ karyo kānajī re, karavā anek janano uddhāra, muktānandane vā'le mahā sukh āpiyun re, karī nitya navalā neh vihāra... ā avasar 4
God’s abode is Gunatit, i.e. above all material qualities. And we want to make all jivas gunātit. We have heard this spiritual knowledge, which is not possible to get anywhere else, and we will be unable to stay elsewhere. And he whom we have attained is not likely to let us go elsewhere, since he knows how (to keep us with him). And those who listen to today’s knowledge and go to his abode are not tempted by Shvetdwip and anything below it. This spiritual knowledge is like the Portuguese canons.1 Compared to it other knowledge is just like a firecracker. Footnotes: 1. 1. It destroys many enemies at a time.
Vaat 1.48
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 48 · Chapter 1 · Verse 48
Badrikāshram ne Shvetdvīpnā muktane tyāg-vairāgyanu baḷ chhe, ne Goloknā ne Vaikunṭhnā muktane prem mukhya chhe, ne Akṣhardhāmnā mukta brahmarūp chhe.
The muktas of Badrikashram and Shvetdwip have the strength of renunciation and separation (from the vishays). The muktas of Golok and Vaikunth primarily have love (toward God). The muktas of Akshardham are brahmarup.
Vaat 1.49
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 49 · Chapter 1 · Verse 49
Bhagwānnā bhaktane viṣhay-sukh maḷe e ja nark chhe. Te kahyu chhe je, Kuntājī dukh māng ke līno, ehi bhakta kī rīti ve; Viṣhay ānand na lahe supan me, jāhi Prabhupad prīti ve.1 E bhaktanu lakṣhaṇ chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mahābhāratmā yuddhavirām bād traṇ Ashvamedh Yagna dvārā mṛutātmāonī shānti karī Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Pānḍavone rājyadhurā sopyā bād Dvārkā javā prayāṇ kare chhe. Rāj-kārbhārmā gūnthāyelā Kuntājī Bhagwānne maḷavā navarāsh laī shakyā nahī. Chhevaṭe prayāṇ veḷāe maḷe chhe, tyāre prārthanā kare chhe ke “Vipadah santu nah shashvat...” “He Bhagwān! Amane paḷe paḷe vipattio āve, jethī karīne tamane yād to karī shakīe...” (Bhāgwat: 1/8/25)
For a devotee of God, attaining pleasures of the senses is itself narak. It has been said: Kuntājī dukh māng ke līno, ehi bhakta kī rīti ve; Viṣhay ānand na lahe supan me, jāhi Prabhupad prīti ve.1 That is the characteristic of a devotee. Footnotes: 1. 1. After the Mahabharat war, the Pandavas performed the Ashwarmedh Yagna for the benefit of those who died in the battle. After the yagna finished, Shri Krishna was returning back to Dwarika. Kuntaji was very busy with the management of the royal duties and forgot about Krishna. When Krishna was taking leave, she asked Krishna for misery so that he can be remembered forever. (Bhagwat: 1/8/25).
Vaat 1.50
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 50 · Chapter 1 · Verse 50
Ā sarve kām mūkīne āvīne navarā besīne vātu sāmbhaḷīe chhīe, te em samajvu je, karoḍ kām karīe chhīe. Te shu je, Jampurī, chorāsī, garbhavās e sarvane māthe līṭā tāṇīe chhīe paṇ navarā beṭhā chhīe em na samajvu.
When we set aside all work and become free to listen to these spiritual discourses, understand that we are doing tens of millions of tasks. What are they? Through these tasks one’s destiny for hell and rebirth is obliterated. But do not think we are sitting idly.
Vaat 1.51
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 51 · Chapter 1 · Verse 51
Ā to baḷiyā chhe te game evī vāsanā hashe to paṇ antkāḷe Hīrjīnī peṭhe nastar mārīne1 dehnī khabar rahevā deshe nahi ne vāsanā ṭāḷī nākhe evā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vāḍh-kāp karīne.
The greatness of this Sadhu is such that he will eradicate all our vāsanā no matter how strong it is during the last moments of our life. Just as Hirji makes in incision (to perform an operation), the Sadhu will eradicate our desires and ensure that we do not remain attached to our body.
Vaat 1.52
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 52 · Chapter 1 · Verse 52
Moṭā shahernu sevan tathā adhikār tathā dhanno prasang e ādik jīvne bagāḍvānā hetu chhe, māṭe samajī rākhavu.
One should understand that the jiva is spoilt by enjoying the temptations of a big city, its power and wealth.
Vaat 1.53
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 53 · Chapter 1 · Verse 53
Nirantar mandirnu kām karyā kare to paṇ gnān vṛuddhi pāme nahī ne gnān to sādhu-samāgamthī ja thāy.
Spiritual wisdom may not develop, even in one who is continually engaged in mandir service. Spiritual knowledge is attained only through close association with sadhus.
Vaat 1.54
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 54 · Chapter 1 · Verse 54
Shāstramā bhāre-bhāre prāyashchitt kahyā chhe te sarve āvā Sādhunā samāgam ne darshane karīne nivṛutt thaī jāy chhe, evu ā darshan chhe.
Many difficult atonements for sins have been described in the scriptures. But they all become redundant in the company and darshan of such a Sadhu. Such is the importance of his darshan.
Vaat 1.55
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 55 · Chapter 1 · Verse 55
Vāchhaḍāne dūdhno svād chhe ane ītaḍīne1 lohīno svād chhe, tem khāvā-pīvānu sukh ne mān-moṭāīnu sukh te lohī jevu chhe ne Nijātmānam brahmarūpam2 e sukh dūdh jevu chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ītaraḍī: pashuonā sharīr par nājuk bhāgmā chīpakī rahetu lohī pīnār jantu. 2. Shrījī Mahārāje Shikṣhāpatrīmā lakhelo 116mo shlok ṭākīne Guṇātītānand Swāmī sādhakne nirvighna sādhanā māṭe jaṇāve chhe ke potānā ātmāne traṇ deh, traṇ guṇ, traṇ avasthāthī par brahmarūp mānīne Parabrahmanī bhakti karavī.
A calf enjoys the taste of milk while a tick tastes only blood. Similarly, the pleasures of eating, drinking and worldly status are like blood, whereas the pleasure of ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam,’ i.e. believing oneself as brahmarup, is like milk.
Vaat 1.56
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 56 · Chapter 1 · Verse 56
Bhagwānnī upāsanānu baḷ hoy tene mahāpralay1 jevu dukh āvī paḍe to paṇ em samaje je, ‘Deh to paḍī jāshe ne āpaṇe Bhagwānnā dhāmmā jāshu,’ em samajīne sukhiyo rahe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Kalpne ante vishvano sampūrṇa nāsh.
Even if one encounters intense misery, like the final destruction of the world, one who has firmly developed the upāsanā of God understands that the body will die one day and we (the ātmā) will go to God’s abode. With this understanding one remains happy.
Vaat 1.57
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 57 · Chapter 1 · Verse 57
Āvā sādhu khāsaḍā māre to paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā laī jāy ne bījā masharūnā gādlāmā suvāḍī mūke to paṇ narkamā nākhe em samajavu.
Such a Sadhu may hit devotees with boots, but will still take them to Akshardham. Others may give devotees comfortable beds to sleep on but will send them to hell.
Vaat 1.58
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 58 · Chapter 1 · Verse 58
Āpaṇā doṣh to Mahārāje ṭāḷī nākhyā chhe ne te doṣhnu darshan thāy chhe te to āpaṇā rūḍāne arthe thāy chhe, nīkar jīv to unmatt thaī jāy evo chhe; ane have to āpaṇe Bhagwān vash karavā chhe ne te Bhagwānnā jevu sāmarthya pāmavu chhe te sāru manḍyā chhīe.
Maharaj has already eradicated our flaws.1 And that we realize our faults is for our own benefit, otherwise, the jiva would become impudent. Now, all our efforts are to win God’s favor and to attain powers like his. Footnotes: 1. 1. With these words, Swami is giving aspirants strength to not lose courage when seeing their faults. God and the Satpurush have the power to eradicate one’s vices. However, one should think of the attainment of God and continue to fight their internal enemies when they arise.
Vaat 1.59
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 59 · Chapter 1 · Verse 59
‘Brahmarūp mānīne bhakti karavī’ e ja siddhānt chhe, te jem ghaṇā māṇas vaṭale ne ek jaṇ nātmā rahe paṇ tene em samajavu je, ‘Hu vaṭalyo nathī,’ tem brahmarūp mānvānī samajaṇ chhe.
The main principle is to worship God identifying oneself as brahmarup. This is similar to many people being proselytized; and one who is not believes he has not been proselytized. This is the understanding of believing oneself to be brahmarup.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this example, Swami explains that many people behave as the body. Despite their ātmā being immortal and a source of bliss, they believe themselves to be the body and enjoy the temporary happiness of the body. This is analogous to someone being proselytized - meaning one has been proselytized into a community of those who believe themselves to be the body. However, one who has not been proselytized believes his true self to be the ātmā. The community of those who believe themselves to be brahmarup may be small but this is the true community.
Vaat 1.60
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 60 · Chapter 1 · Verse 60
Ā karma-kṣhetra chhe te ahī ek upavās kare ne Badrikāshrammā so upavās kare ne Shvetdvīpmā hajār upavās kare te barābar thāy chhe; ne ā ghaḍī, ā paḷ ne ā Sādhu koṭi kalpe paṇ maḷvā durlabh chhe, paṇ mahimā jaṇāto nathī; kem je, manuṣhyākṛuti chhe.
This world is a place for action. Thus, one fast here equals a hundred observed in Badrikashram and a thousand in Shvetdwip. And this moment and this Sadhu are rarely attained even after millions of years. But his glory is not fully understood, since he is in human form.
Vaat 1.61
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 61 · Chapter 1 · Verse 61
Tamoguṇīne mān vadhāre hoy ne rajoguṇīne kām vadhāre hoy ne sattvaguṇīne gnān vadhāre hoy.
One who has tamogun possesses ego to a higher degree. One who has rajogun has lust to a higher degree. And one who has sattvagun has wisdom to a higher degree.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is not stating an absolute principle here with these words, but stating an observation that is generally seen. No one individual always behaves in tamogun, rajogun, or sattavagun. All three of these gunas of māyā are found in some proportion in all; however, one is sometimes more predominant than the other two.
Vaat 1.62
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 62 · Chapter 1 · Verse 62
Jyāre Duryodhanne ne Pānḍavne kajiyo thavāno ādar thayo tyāre Duryodhan pāse daitya sarve āvīne kahe je, “Ame Kṛupāchāryamā, Droṇāchāryamā ne Bhīṣhmapitā ādikmā pravesh karashu. Māṭe yuddha karya.” Em kahyu. Temā kahevānu shu chhe je, āpaṇāmā kām, krodhādik māhilā doṣh āvīne pravesh kare tyāre moṭāno avaguṇ āve, tyāre na karavānu paṇ thāy; tyāre jāṇavu je, ‘Mārāmā daitye pravesh karyo chhe paṇ hu evo nathī,’ em samajavu.
When conflict first started between Duryodhan and the Pandavs, all the demons approached Duryodhan and said, “We will influence Kripacharya, Dronacharya, Bhishma Pita and others, so go to war.” The message from this is that when faults such as lust, anger, etc. enter into us, faults are attributed to the great, and so one may do what one should not (improper things may be done). At such times, realize that, “I have been influenced by demons and that (in reality) I am not like this.”
Vaat 1.63
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 63 · Chapter 1 · Verse 63
Keṭalīk kasar tyāg-vairāgyathī ṭaḷashe ne keṭalīk kasar gnāne karīne ṭaḷashe ne keṭalīk kasar bhakti karāvīne ṭaḷāvshu ne bākī chhellī vāre rog prerīne paṇ shuddha karavā chhe paṇ kasar rahevā devī nathī.
Some drawbacks will be cured through renunciation and detachment, some through spiritual knowledge, some through devotion and any defects left will finally be cured through illness. But I want to make you pure and not leave any faults.
Vaat 1.64
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 64 · Chapter 1 · Verse 64
Dharmashāḷā karavānu kām karāve chhe. Temā kahe chhe je, “Āgnāe karīne dharmashāḷāyu to anant karīe paṇ temā bandhāvu nahi ne bandhāvu to Bhagwān ne Sādhu e bemā ja bandhāvu.”
While work on the guesthouse was in progress Swami said, “If instructed I can build countless such guesthouses, and yet remain unattached. And if one is to be attached, it should be only to God and his Sadhu.”
Vaat 1.65
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 65 · Chapter 1 · Verse 65
Shāstramā keṭalāk vachan to siddhāntrūp hoy1 ne keṭalāk vachan to koī nimitt arthe2 hoy te samajī rākhavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jem ke, Shikṣhāpatrīmā ‘Nijātmānam brahmarūpam,’ shlok 116. 2. Naimittik karmanu pālan karavārūp. Jem ke, vratpālan, tīrthāṭan, rajaswalāsnān, grahaṇ vakhate nāhavu ityādi.
In the scriptures, some words are important principles, while others are for some other objective. The difference (in these words) should be understood.
Vaat 1.66
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 66 · Chapter 1 · Verse 66
Sharad-ṛutumā ākāsh nirmaḷ joīne bolyā je, “Āvu antahkaraṇ thāy tyāre jīv sukhiyo thāy, tem satsang karatā karatā thāy chhe.”
Seeing the clear, peaceful sky in the autumn season, Swami said, “If the inner faculties become pure like this, the jiva experiences bliss. This happens gradually while doing satsang.”
Vaat 1.67
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 67 · Chapter 1 · Verse 67
Moṭāno mat e chhe je, anek prakāre deh-daman karavu ane ṭāḍh, taḍako, bhūkh, taras tenu sahan karavu paṇ kevaḷ dehnu jatan karavu nahi.
The great Sadhu believes that the body should be tested in many ways and cold, heat, hunger, thirst should be tolerated. But the body should not merely be pampered.
Vaat 1.68
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 68 · Chapter 1 · Verse 68
Niranjanānand Swāmī pāse bese to antar ṭāḍhu thaī jāy, tem evā moṭā sādhu pāse bese to sukh āve. Te kene sukh āve? Te jene temā het hoy tene āve.
By sitting with Niranjananand Swami, one experiences total peace within. Thus, sitting with such great sadhus gives happiness. Who experiences this happiness? One who has affection for him.
Vaat 1.69
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 69 · Chapter 1 · Verse 69
Koṭi kalpe ā vāt hāth āvī chhe paṇ te satsang rājāne, nātīlāne ne gharnā māṇasne nathī gamato ne indriyu, antahkaraṇne paṇ nathī gamato ne ek jīvne ja game chhe ne māyā to peṭ kūṭe chhe je, mārā hāththī gayo.
This opportunity of meeting God and his holy Sadhu has come after millions of years. But the king, community, relations and family members do not like it. Even the senses and inner faculties do not like it. Only the jiva likes it. And māyā is lamenting that ‘he (the jiva) has slipped out of my hands.’
Vaat 1.70
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 70 · Chapter 1 · Verse 70
Sādhan karī karīne marī jāy to paṇ vāsanā ṭaḷe nahi. E to Moṭā anugrah kare tyāre ja ṭaḷe chhe.
One may engage in many endeavours and yet die without overcoming desires. They are overcome only by the grace of the great Sadhu.
Vaat 1.71
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 71 · Chapter 1 · Verse 71
Āpaṇu to darshan karashe tenu paṇ kalyāṇ thāshe, paṇ bahu mahimā kahīe to koī vartamān pāḷe nahi, ne ā to mukte deh dharyā chhe ne vāsanā jevu jaṇāy chhe te to deh dharyo teno bhāv jaṇāy chhe, nīkar to deh rahe nahi.
Whoever has our darshan will be liberated. However, if we reveal [your] greatness much more than that, then no one will observe the religious vows. And today, the muktas have taken birth; and it may seem they have vāsanā, but this is because they have assumed a body that will show its qualities. Otherwise, the body would not remain.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is explaining that we must understand that the devotees of God are not ordinary but are the muktas of Akshardham. We may notice their faults and desires because they have assumed a human body, but we must believe that this is not a characteristic of their true form, the ātmā.
Vaat 1.72
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 72 · Chapter 1 · Verse 72
Mahārājnī kahelī vāt karī je, “Mahārāj kahe je, ‘Karoḍ vahāṇe karīne ek manavār1 bharāy evī so karoḍ manavāryu bharavī chhe, eṭalā jīvnu kalyāṇ karavu chhe. Te eṭalā jīvnu kalyāṇ kem thāya? Pachhī ame vichār karyo je, amāru darshan kare tenu kalyāṇ. Vaḷī, em vichār karyo je, amāru darshan te keṭalāk jīvne thashe? Māṭe amārā sādhunā darshan kare tenu paṇ kalyāṇ. Pachhī vaḷī temā paṇ vichār thayo je, sādhunu darshan paṇ keṭalāk jīvne thāshe? Māṭe amārā satsangīnu darshan kare tenu paṇ kalyāṇ; ne satsangīne jamāḍe ne enu jame, ne satsangīne pāṇī pāy ne enu pāṇī pīe, e sarvenu kalyāṇ karavu chhe.’” Footnotes: 1. 1. Moṭu vahāṇ.
Maharaj said, “One huge ship is filled by ten million boats. We want to fill 1000 million such huge ships. To that many jivas we want to grant moksha. And how can that many jivas attain moksha? Then I thought that those who have my darshan will get moksha. Again I thought, how many jivas will get my darshan? So those who have the darshan of my sadhus will also get moksha. Again I thought, how many jivas will have darshan of my sadhus? Therefore, those who have the darshan of my satsangis will also get moksha. Also, those who feed satsangis, those who eat from them, those who serve them water and those who drink their water, to all, I want to grant moksha.”
Vaat 1.73
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 73 · Chapter 1 · Verse 73
‘Gurunu Ang’1 bolāvyu, temā prashna pūchhyo je, “Ā ‘Angmā’ to sarve vāt guru ja kare em kahyu chhe paṇ kāī puruṣh-prayatnanu to kahyu nathī te kem samajavu?” Tyāre teno uttar karyo je, “Sarve vāt guru ja kare chhe, tyāre ahī avāṇu chhe. Ane hamaṇā em chhe je, sarve doṣh ṭaḷī jāy to pachhī sukhe sūī rahe, pachhī koīk ṭoke to paṇ na khamāy, ne gnān vinā to unmatt thaī jāy. Māṭe sarva karatā gnān shreṣhṭh chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Brahmānand Swāmī rachit manahar chhandamā varṇavel gurumahimā: ‘Gurudev jananī janak ru sambandhi bandhu, pūran atyanta sukh guruhu se pāyo hai, nāsikā badan bain dine guru divya nain, shobhit shravan deke shabda sunāyo hai; diye guru kar pāv shītaltā shiṣhyabhāv, gururāy pinḍahu me prāṇ ṭhaharāyo hai, kahat hai Brahmānand kand sukh dayāsindhu, gurudev mero ghāṭ dūsaro banāyo hai.’
“When all faults are overcome, one sleeps in peace. But otherwise if someone scolds, it is not tolerated. Without spiritual wisdom, one becomes mad. Therefore, spiritual wisdom is superior to everything else.”
Vaat 1.74
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 74 · Chapter 1 · Verse 74
Bhagwān ne Sādhunā mahimānī bahu vāt karī. Tyāre prashna pūchhyo je, “Āvo mahimāno sākṣhātkār kem thato nathī?” Teno uttar karyo je, “Sākṣhātkār thāy to chhakī javāy, māṭe dhīre dhīre gnān āpe chhe ne mahimā vṛuddhi pamāḍe chhe. Jem faḷ, puṣhp vṛuddhi pāme chhe tem thāy chhe. E Bhagwānne jem ghaṭe tem āvaḍe chhe ne jem ghaṭe tem kare chhe, ne ṭhāmūku1 āpe to gānḍā thaī javāy. Māṭe e Bhagwān ṭhīk ja kare chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Ekī sāthe, badhu.
There was much talk regarding the glory of God and his Sadhu. Then a question was asked, “Why is such glory not fully realized?” The answer, “If one gets full realization, one gets carried away. Therefore, spiritual knowledge is given slowly and the glory of God is gradually understood – just as flowers and fruits grow slowly. Thus, God knows what is necessary and does what is appropriate. If he gives everything at once, one will go mad. Thus, whatever God does is proper.”
Vaat 1.75
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 75 · Chapter 1 · Verse 75
Ā to anant bhagwānnā Bhagwān chhe, eṭalu ja kahīe chhīe. Ethī āghu keṭaluk kahīe? Te āpaṇā gharmā āvīne beṭhā chhe, ā to kūbāmā1 jem hāthī bāndhe chhe tem chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Garīb loko ghāsthī chhāvarī laī ghar bāndhe te.
This [Bhagwan Swaminarayan] is the God of infinite Gods; that is all we are saying. How much more than this can we say? He has come and is sitting in our house - this is like an elephant sitting in a hut.
Vaat 1.76
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 76 · Chapter 1 · Verse 76
Āpaṇe to Bhagwānno khap nathī paṇ Bhagwān āvīne parāṇe āpaṇne vaḷagyā chhe. Te Mahārāj kahe, “Bhūt vaḷage chhe te paṇ nathī mūkatu, to ame kem mūkashu?”
We do not have a desire for God, but God has forced himself on us. Maharaj says, “When a ghost possesses [a body], it does not leave, so why should God leave?”
Vaat 1.77
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 77 · Chapter 1 · Verse 77
Bhagwān jīvnā gunā sāmu jotā nathī. Te koī jīv Bhagwānnī stuti karīne em bole je, “Hu gunegār chhu,” to tenā gunā Bhagwān māf kare chhe.
God does not look at the faults of the jivas. If a jiva prays to God and says, “I am at fault,” then God forgives him of his faults.
Vaat 1.78
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 78 · Chapter 1 · Verse 78
Amane to ek janma-maraṇno rog ṭāḷatā āvaḍe chhe, bīju āvaḍatu nathī.
Swami said, “I know only how to cure the disease of birth and death, but not anything else.”
Vaat 1.79
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 79 · Chapter 1 · Verse 79
“Sarva prakārnī āsakti ṭaḷī jāy to ā lok ne ā deh te game nahi ne ā lokmā rahevu paḍe te dukh thāy,” em bolyā. Te upar prashna pūchhyo je, “Āsakti rahe chhe tenu dukh thāy chhe, tenu kem karavu?” Pachhī teno uttar karyo je, “E dukh sāru kare chhe, kem je, nirmānī rahevāy; te Bhagwān karatā hashe te ṭhīk karatā hashe. Ne dehnu rūp to gām Faṇeṇīmā Surā Khācharne kān dekhāḍyo te bhegī ūlaṭī thaī, tem bījāne dekhāy to evu thāy.”
“When one overcomes all desires (of enjoying vishays), then one would not like this world or their body. And they would be pained having to live in this world.” Thus, Swami spoke. Someone asked a question regarding this, “What should one do about the pain experienced because one still has desires?” Swami answered, “That pain is beneficial, because it allows one to remain humble. Whatever God does is appropriate. And [Maharaj] revealed the form of the body to Sura Khachar in the village Faneni by showing him the form of the ear. This caused Sura Khachar to vomit. If others saw similarly, the same would happen to them.”
Vaat 1.80
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 80 · Chapter 1 · Verse 80
‘Vachanāmṛut’ vanchāvīne temā bahu vāt karī ne bolyā je, “Āvu gnān to sange karīne ne kāḷe karīne thāy, jem vidyā bhaṇe chhe tem thāy paṇ anugrah thakī na thāy; ne anugrah kare to samādhi thāy, te Vignāndāsjīne Akṣhardhām dekhātu to paṇ be ghar karyā ne sādhue kāḍhyā tyāre nīkaḷyā. Māṭe gnān shreṣhṭh chhe.”
Swami had the Vachanamrut read, then talked a great deal. Then, he said, “This level of gnān is gained by the company [of a Sadhu] or over time, just as one studies to gain knowledge. However, [knowledge is not gained] by grace. If [God or the Satpurush] shower grace, then one may experience samādhi, just as Vignandasji saw Akshardham. Nevertheless, he married twice. He got out [of that relationship] only when the Sadhu pulled him out. Therefore, gnān is the best.”
Vaat 1.81
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 81 · Chapter 1 · Verse 81
Ā to prabandhe1 karīne rākhīe chhīe paṇ dhan ne strī na joīe evā māṇas jhājhā jaḍe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Niyame karīne.
We sustain everyone because of an arrangement we made;1 otherwise, one cannot find many people who do not desire wealth and women. Footnotes: 1. 1. The arrangement that Swami speaks of is the establishment of niyams. Without observance of niyams, one would transgress their religious vows, and hence no one would sustain in satsang.
Vaat 1.82
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 82 · Chapter 1 · Verse 82
‘Vachanāmṛut’nī ākhī pratyu paṇ satsangmā sahāy nahi kare, te to pustak mūkī mūkīne paṇ chālyā jāy chhe. Māṭe sahāy to āvā Sādhu karashe.
The whole manuscript of the Vachanamrut will not help in satsang. Many leave [satsang] leaving behind the manuscripts. Only a Sadhu like this one will help.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is explaining that the Satpurush is needed in order to sustain in satsang. Relying only on reading of the Vachanamrut or other scriptures will not help. This is also the case for becoming brahmarup. One needs the manifest guru who is the form of Aksharbrahman. However, one cannot become brahmarup by reading scriptures alone.
Vaat 1.83
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 83 · Chapter 1 · Verse 83
Loyānā Sātmā Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe je, indriyu, antahkaraṇ ne anubhav e traṇe pūge tyāre pūro gnānī kahevāy. Te upar bolyā je, “Āpaṇe to sarve pūge chhe ne nathī dekhātu te to enī ichchhā chhe.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Ā kathanmā Guṇātītānand Swāmī kahe chhe ke jene pratyakṣh Parabrahma Puruṣhottam Nārāyaṇ ke Akṣharbrahma Satpuruṣh evā guruno yathārth nishchay chhe, tene to Vachanāmṛut Loyā 7 pramāṇe indriyo, antahkaraṇ ane anubhav pahonchelā ja chhe. Kāraṇ ke indriyo dvārā pratyakṣh Bhagwānnā darshan, sparsh, shravaṇ vagere kare chhe; antahkaraṇ dvārā pratyakṣh Bhagwānnu manan, chintan, dhyān, gnān vagere paṇ kare chhe; ane pratyakṣh Bhagwānnā divya sukhno anubhav paṇ mumukṣhunī pātratā pramāṇe thato rahe chhe. Kadāch koī mumukṣhune potānī yathārth pātratāne abhāve āvo divya anubhav nā thāy ane tene līdhe te sādhanāmā udās ane nirāsh na thāy, te māṭe Swāmī ahī baḷnī vāt karatā kahe chhe ke na dekhāy to emanī ichchhā chhe em samajīne paṇ potāne kṛutārth mānavu.
[Maharaj] has said in Vachanamrut Loya 7 that, when one has reached the realization of gnān through the indriyas, antahkaran, and experience, then one can be called a complete gnāni. Regarding this, Swami said, “We have reached everything. But we do not realize this because it is his wish.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami states that because we have attained God in the form of the Satpurush, we can realize God through all three: indriyas - through sight, touch, hearing, etc.; antahkaran - by contemplating and meditating; and experience - by experiencing bliss within.
Vaat 1.84
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 84 · Chapter 1 · Verse 84
Pāṇīnā dharā1 jevu to Shvetdvīpnā muktane rahe chhe ne Akṣhardhāmnī to vāt ja shī kahevāy! Ne ā lokmā keṭlāk prakārnā vikṣhep āve, māṭe ṭhonṭ mārīne moḍhu rātu rākhavu evu chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ūnḍā pāṇīnā bharelā dharāmā jevī shītaḷtā hoy chhe, tevī antarmā shānti.
The peace experienced by the released souls of Shvetdwip is like a cool, placid water pool. What, then, can be said of the peace experienced by the liberated souls in Akshardham? And there are many obstacles in this world. Therefore, it is like keeping the face red (apparently healthy) by slapping it (i.e. there is no real happiness in the material world).
Vaat 1.85
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 85 · Chapter 1 · Verse 85
Nand Rājāe ākhī pṛuthvīnu dhan bheḷu karyu ne chhellī vāre emāthī mot thayu,1 ne Chitraketu Rājāe karoḍ striyu bheḷī karī ne chhellī vāre temāthī dukh thayu tyāre mūkī;2 te mārg ja evo chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nand Rājā ati lobhī hatā. Temaṇe pṛuthvīmānu badhu ja dhan potānī pāse bhegu karī dīdhu hatu. Temanī pāse Varāhnu hāḍku hatu. Jenā dvārā teo samudramā taḷiye jaī shakatā ane tyā badhu dhan mūkī āvatā. Parantu Nāradjīnā kahevāthī temanī rāṇīe ‘Ā hāḍku Nand Rājānī agāunī rāṇīnu hāḍku chhe’ em mānī laī, tene chūlāmā bāḷī dīdhu. Ā samāchār maḷatā Nand Rājā tarat mṛutyu pāmyā. 2. Ek nihsantān rājā. Angirā Ṛuṣhie tvaṣhṭādevanī prasādī mukhya rāṇī kṛuta-dyutine khavaḍāvī. Karoḍo strī paikī ek j strī santānavāḷī thaī. Bījī strīone īrṣhyā āvī ke e mānītī thaī jashe. āthī kunvarane zer āpī mārī nākhyo. Rājā vadhu duhkhī thayo, nāradajīnā upadeshathī sāchun jnyān thayun. Chhevaṭe badhun chhoḍī yamunātaṭe tap karī sukhī thayo.
King Nand1 hoarded all the wealth of the world and finally died from attachment to it. King Chitraketu2 had ten million wives and finally left them when they brought him misery. This path of attachment to wealth and women is like that. Footnotes: 1. 1. A greedy king who gathered all the wealth of the world. He had a bone of Varah, by which he could go to the ocean floor to store his wealth. Naradji told king Nand’s queen that it belonged to the previous queen and that he kept it as a reminder of his affection for her. This upset the present queen, who threw the bone in the fire. Hearing this, Nand died instantly of shock. 2. A king of the Yadu lineage. He was childless. Then Angira rishi fed Chitraketu’s senior queen, Krutadyuti, sanctified food from Tvashta Dev. Thus, out of the king’s ten million queens only one bore a son. All the others were jealous so they poisoned and killed the newborn prince. The king was very upset. By the spiritual discourses of Naradji, the king gained spiritual insight and eventually renounced everything to perform austerities on the banks of the Ganga.
Vaat 1.86
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 86 · Chapter 1 · Verse 86
Āpaṇāmā tyāgī thaī jāy chhe ne sansār mūkī de chhe, e to Bhagwānmā het te taṇāī āve. E to jog chhe paṇ sānkhya nahi, ne het to āngaḷī truṭatu hoy paṇ sānkhya nahi, ne jene sānkhya hoy ne sādhu thāvā āve ne tene kahīe je, gharnā māṇas sarve gharmā sūtā hoy ne ghar bāḷīne āvo to sādhu karīe; to sānkhyavāḷāne e kaṭhaṇ na paḍe ne jogvāḷāthī e thāy nahi.
In our fellowship a person renounces worldly ties and becomes a renunciant because he has love for God and so is drawn to him. This is Yoga, but not Sānkhya. There may be much love for God but that is not Sānkhya. And if a practitioner of Sānkhya comes to become a sadhu and is told that he will only be made a sadhu if he goes and burns his family who is at home, then it is not difficult for him to do so. But one with mere Yoga cannot do this.
Vaat 1.87
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 87 · Chapter 1 · Verse 87
Chintāmaṇi kāī rūpāḷī na hoy, tem Bhagwān ne Sādhu paṇ manuṣhya jevā ja hoy paṇ e divya chhe ne kalyāṇkārī chhe. Ne manuṣhyanu deh chintāmaṇi chhe.
The chintāmani is not necessarily beautiful to look at. Similarly, God and his holy Sadhu may look like humans but they are divine and give moksha. And this human body is rare, like a chintāmani.
Vaat 1.88
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 88 · Chapter 1 · Verse 88
Jo mār mār karato koī āvato hoy to em samajavu je, ‘Mārā Swāmīnu ja karyu sarve thāy chhe, paṇ te vinā koīnu halāvyu pānaḍu paṇ halatu nathī.’
If someone comes charging at us with the intent of beating us, we should understand that everything happens according to my Swami’s wishes; however, without his will, no one can stir a leaf.
Vaat 1.89
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 89 · Chapter 1 · Verse 89
‘Vāndaru Vaikunṭhmā rahe nahi’ em kahe chhe, te sāru āpaṇe Bhagwān pāse rahevāy evā swabhāv karavā; te āhī karavā kā Shvetdvīpmā jaīne karavā.
It is said, “Monkeys cannot stay in Vaikunth.”1 Therefore, we should cultivate our nature in such a way that we can stay with God. This should be done here or after going to Shvetdwip. Footnotes: 1. 1. Lord Ram graced the monkeys with a place in his abode. But, they quarrelled among themselves and misbehaved and so were sent back to earth.
Vaat 1.90
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 90 · Chapter 1 · Verse 90
Brahmānḍ ākhu Swāminārāyaṇnu bhajan karashe tyāre satsang thayo em jāṇavu ne tyā sudhī thāvo chhe. Ne ek ek sādhunī keḍye1 lākh lākh māṇas farashe tyā sudhī satsang thāvo chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Pāchhaḷ.
Satsang is said to be established when the whole universe worships Swaminarayan. And it is going to spread until then. Satsang will grow until there are hundreds of thousands of people following each sadhu (of the Swaminarayan faith).
Vaat 1.91
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 91 · Chapter 1 · Verse 91
Jīvne choṭavānā ṭhekāṇā be ja chhe, te Bhagwānamā choṭe nīkar māyāmā chonṭe. Paṇ ādhār vinā kem rahevāy?
There are only two places where the jiva becomes attached. Either to God or to māyā. But how is it possible to exist without support?
Vaat 1.92
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 92 · Chapter 1 · Verse 92
“Doṣh kem ṭaḷatā nathī?” E prashna pūchhyo. Teno uttar je, “E to Dhanvantar Vaid1 chhe te khoṭā kem thāshe? Ne jem Akṣharānand Swāmīne goḷī daīne rāfī2 kāḍhī nākhī, tem ja kām-krodhādik ghaṇī rāfiyu chhe, te kāḍhī mūkashe. Āpaṇe to ene bāzī paḍavu eṭalu ja karavu.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Viṣhṇuno termo avatār. Āyurvednā pravartak Dhanvantari, Dīrghatamānā putra ane Ketumānnā pitā hatā. Purāṇ anusār Samudra-manthan vakhate nīkaḷelā chaud ratno paikī amṛutkumbh sāthe teo pragaṭ thayelā. Bhāgprakāsh granth mujab Indre swayam āyurved shikhavāḍīne temane pṛuthvī par lokkalyāṇ māṭe mokalyā hatā. (Bhāgwat: 9/17/4-5 tathā Viṣhṇu Purāṇ: 4/8/8-11) 2. Hāthī jevo pag thaī javāno ek jātno rog. Te ek jātnu jantujanya pagnu darad chhe. Sādhāraṇ rīte te eḍī ke faṇāmā thāy chhe. Temā ghaṇā chhidro paḍī paru vahe chhe. Tenā dāṇā rātā, dhoḷā ke kāḷā hoy chhe. Rāfīvāḷo pagno bhāg ṭheṭh hāḍakā sudhī saḍī jāy chhe.
Someone asked, “Why can’t the flaws be destroyed?” Swami answered, “How can the physician Dhanvantar be proved wrong?1 Just as Aksharanand Swami’s disease of the feet was cured by giving him a pill, there are many diseases, such as lust, anger, etc., that [the Satpurush] will cure. We simply have to cling to him. That is all we have to do.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The analogy Swami draws is that the medicine prescribed by Dhanvantar, an ayurvedic physician, cannot be wrong. Similarly, the Satpurush will certainly cure the jivas’ disease.
Vaat 1.93
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 93 · Chapter 1 · Verse 93
Gāfalāī ṭāḷavānu kāraṇ e chhe je, khaṭako rākhe to ṭaḷe ne bījo upāy to koīk shikṣhā kare tyāre ṭaḷe.
Complacency can be overcome if we are vigilant or if someone punishes us.
Vaat 1.94
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 94 · Chapter 1 · Verse 94
Ā to bahu moṭo lābh thayo chhe paṇ ūnghmā jāy chhe, te shu je, viṣhaymā suṣhupti nirantar varte chhe.1 Ne ā darshan to panch-mahāpāpne2 bāḷī mūke evu chhe paṇ mahimā jaṇāto nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Viṣhaymā suṣhupti vartavī eṭale viṣhay-bhogmāthī kyārey bahār na āvavu te. 2. Brahmahatyā, suvarṇanī chorī, surāpān, guru-strī-gaman tathā ā chār māhelā koīno sang karavo.
For us this is a great opportunity, but we let it pass in sleep. How? We are deeply engrossed in the enjoyment of material pleasures, but by the mere darshan of the Sadhu the five grave sins1 are burnt away. However, we do not know his glory. Footnotes: 1. 1. Five grave sins: killing a Brahmin, stealing gold (or money), drinking alcohol, illicit relations with wife of one’s guru and company of one committing any of the previous four sins.
Vaat 1.95
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 95 · Chapter 1 · Verse 95
‘Karmavipāk’ nāme granth chhe te Mahārāje vanchāvyo hato. Temā kahyu chhe je, ‘Ā pāpe karīne ā rog thāy,’ e prakāre temā ghaṇo vistār karyo chhe.
Maharaj had the scripture Karmavipāk read. The scripture elaborates on each sin that leads to the respective disease.
Vaat 1.96
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 96 · Chapter 1 · Verse 96
Ākhī pṛuthvīmā ek māṇas mare teno kāī kharkharo thāy chhe? Tem Akṣharnī draṣhṭine je pāme chhe tene ākhā brahmānḍno pralay thāy to paṇ thaḍako na thāy, evī paṇ ek samajaṇ chhe.
Does one lament after the death of one person from the whole earth? Similarly, when one acquires the perspective of Akshar, then even if the whole brahmānd undergoes dissolution, one would not fret. This is that type of understanding.
Vaat 1.97
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 97 · Chapter 1 · Verse 97
“Sānkhyanī draḍhatā kem thāy?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Māṇas marī jāy chhe, deh gharaḍo thāy chhe, te jovu. Ne nitya-pralay,1 nimitta-pralay2 ne prākṛut-pralay3 teno vichār karavo. Ne sānkhya ne jog siddha karavānu kāraṇ ā samāgam chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Dev, daitya ane manuṣhyādiknā je deh teno kṣhaṇ kṣhaṇ pratye nāsh tene nityapralay kahīe. (Vachanāmṛut Gaḍhaḍā Pratham 12) Jīvo dvārā roj bhogvātī suṣhupti avasthā, e paṇ nityapralay chhe. Nityapralaymā jīvnī upādhi līn thaī jāy chhe. (Vachanāmṛut Amdāvād 2nā ādhāre) 2. Virāṭ Brahmāno divas vītye rātri paḍe chhe tyāre Trilokīno nāsh thāy chhe. Te nimittapralay. Ām, Virāṭ Brahmānī suṣhuptine nimittapralay kahyo chhe. 3. Prākṛut-pralay eṭale mahā-pralay; juo Swāmīnī Vāt: 1/56.
How can Sānkhya (understanding that all material things are perishable) be strengthened? The answer, “Observe that man dies and the body becomes old. Think of the nitya-pralay, nimitta-pralay and prākrut-pralay. And the means to perfecting Sānkhya and Yoga is this association with the great Sadhu.”
Vaat 1.98
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 98 · Chapter 1 · Verse 98
Jem nātno, nāmno ane gāmno nishchay thayo chhe, tem ja evo abhyās kare je, ‘Hu ātmā chhu, brahma chhu, sukhrūp chhu ne Bhagwānno bhakta chhu, paṇ deh te hu nahi;’ em kare to te paṇ thāy. Ne ā deh āpaṇne nitye narak chūnthāve chhe ethī bhūnḍu shu? Paṇ gnān vinā tenī gam nathī.
Just as one is absolutely convinced of one’s community, name and village, similarly, if one repeats, ‘I am ātmā, brahma, blissful and a devotee of God, but I am not this body,’ then this too can be learnt. And this body daily gives us an experience of hell, so what can be worse than that? But without spiritual knowledge we do not realize this.
Vaat 1.99
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 99 · Chapter 1 · Verse 99
Akṣhardhāmnā jevu sukh āhī varte chhe, temā paṇ keṭlāk dukhiyā chhe. Temā dehnu dukh thoḍu ne mannu dukh jhājhu chhe.
The bliss of Akshardham prevails here, yet still, some are miserable. Misery due to the body is a minor cause and misery due to the mind is a major cause.
Vaat 1.100
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 100 · Chapter 1 · Verse 100
Prakṛuti-Puruṣh sudhī traṇ tāp chhe ne traṇ guṇ chhe ne tethī par Guṇātīt sukh chhe.
Up to Prakruti-Purush there are the three miseries and the three gunas. And above this is the bliss of gunātit.
Vaat 1.101
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 101 · Chapter 1 · Verse 101
Bhagwān ne Bhagwānnā Sādhu e be sāmu jovu ne e ja joyā jevā chhe, bījāmā kāī māl nathī.
Observe only God and his holy Sadhu. Only these two are worth observing. There is no worth in anything else.
Vaat 1.102
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 102 · Chapter 1 · Verse 102
“Moṭāne viṣhe manuṣhyabhāv nathī rahyo teno kem tapās karavo?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Enī koī kriyāmā doṣh na āve e ja divyabhāv chhe.”
How can one check to find out that one perceives no human traits in the great (Sadhu)? The answer, “Seeing no faults in any of his actions is to see divinity.”
Vaat 1.103
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 103 · Chapter 1 · Verse 103
Bhagwānnī stuti karavī paṇ potāne patit ke adham mānavu nahi. Kem je, em māne to jīvmā baḷ rahe nahi ne jīv glāni pāmī jāy, ne āpaṇe to Bhagwān maḷyā chhe māṭe patit shā sāru mānīe? Āpaṇe to kṛutārth mānavu.
Pray to God, but do not believe oneself to be sinful and inferior. Since, by thinking like that, the jiva does not remain strong and its strength declines. And we have attained God, so why should we feel fallen? We should feel fulfilled.
Vaat 1.104
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 104 · Chapter 1 · Verse 104
‘Mohā-moha mile nij prītam, kaun patiyār kare patiyāse.’1 - Temā shu kahyu je, kāgaḷnā lakhanārā maḷyā te pachhī kāgaḷnu shu kām? Tem āpaṇne pragaṭ Sant maḷyā chhe have shu bākī rahyu? Footnotes: 1. 1. Artha: potānā priyatam mukhomukh pratyakṣha maḷyā pachhī patramā koṇ vishvās kare?
“Mohā moh mile nij Pritam, kaun patiya kare patiyāse.” Meaning, when one meets the author of the letter himself, what need is there for the letter? Similarly, we have attained the manifest Sadhu, who is God in human form, so what else remains to be achieved?
Vaat 1.105
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 105 · Chapter 1 · Verse 105
Āj to Mahārāj kahe, “Saune bhīḍāmā levā chhe ne saune ekāntik karavā chhe ne vāsanā hashe to Sūryanā lokmā thaīne bāḷīne laī jāshu.”
Today, Maharaj says, “I want to put everyone in trying situations and make everyone spiritually enlightened. And if worldly desires remain I will take you through the realm of the Sun and burn them.”
Vaat 1.106
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 106 · Chapter 1 · Verse 106
Rājānā kuvarne ḍheḍhthī marāy nahi, tem Bhagwānnā bhaktane māthe kāḷ, karma, māyā ādik koīno bhār nahi je tene pīḍī shake.
A person of low birth cannot hit a prince. Similarly, kāl, karma, māyā etc. have no influence over a devotee of God and cannot harass him.
Vaat 1.107
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 107 · Chapter 1 · Verse 107
Sulabhā1 hatī te samādhivāḷī hatī. Te parkāyāmā pravesh karatī evī hatī, paṇ vanmā gaī tyā sāru dekhīne em thayu je, ‘Koī puruṣh hoy to ramīe.’ Footnotes: 1. 1. Ek brahmavādinī strī. Pote kumārikā hatī tyārthī ekalī ja pṛuthvī par vichartī. Teṇe Janaknī prashansā sāmbhaḷī potānu sharīr yog-shaktithī badalīne saundaryavān banāvyu. Mithilāmā jaī bhikṣhā nimitte Janakne maḷī. Parantu Janakne temā moh na thayo. Potāno prabhāv Janak par lāvavā Sulabhā yog-shaktithī Janaknī buddhimā praveshī gaī ne tenā manne bāndhī līdhu. Ek ja sharīrmā Janak ane Sulabhāno samvād thayo. Guru Panchashikhnā pratāpe Janake teno parābhav karyo. (Mahābhārat, Shāntiparva)
Sulabhā could experience samādhi and was able to enter another’s body. However, when she went to the forest and saw the beauty, she thought, “If there was a man, we could play.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Here, Swami gives a example of what he has mentioned in Swamini Vat 1/37: Even if one has the ability to experience samādhi at will, their desires to enjoy the vishays is not eradicated. Sulabhā was a woman who could experience samādhi, yet she still had desires to enjoy the vishays (i.e., desired the company of a man).
Vaat 1.108
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 108 · Chapter 1 · Verse 108
Dharmashāḷā hatī te pāḍīne farī karī, te have prathamnī dekhātī nathī. Em prakṛutinu kārya sarve nāsh karī nākhavu, tenu nām sānkhya kahevāy.
The resthouse for pilgrims was knocked down and has been rebuilt, so now the original cannot be seen. Similarly, to demolish all the works of Prakruti (i.e. to believe that no worldly, physical object is permanent, including one’s own body) is called Sānkhya.
Vaat 1.109
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 109 · Chapter 1 · Verse 109
Potāne jāṇe be māṇasnu kām kare tethī paṇ Moṭānī āgnāe karīne besī rahe athavā kahe eṭalu kare e ja shreṣhṭh chhe.
Someone may single-handedly do the work of two people, but to obey the great Sadhu and sit idle or only do what he says is the best.
Vaat 1.110
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 110 · Chapter 1 · Verse 110
“Viṣhay lopī nākhatā hoy tene Moṭāne rājī karyāno sho upāy?” Prashnano uttar e je, “Moṭānī anuvṛutti ne te je kahe te karavu e ja chhe.”
How can one who is overpowered by the material pleasures please the great Sadhu? The answer is to follow and obey the will of the great.
Vaat 1.111
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 111 · Chapter 1 · Verse 111
“Moṭāne shu karavānu tān chhe te kem samajāy?” E prashnano uttar karyo, temā Vartālnu Soḷmu ‘Vachanāmṛut’ vanchāvīne bolyā je, “Āmā kahyu chhe tem karāvavu chhe. Te shu je, Bhagwānnu bhajan karavu ne Bhagwānnā bhaktano sang e be ja rahasya ne abhiprāy chhe. Te laīne manḍe to rājī thatā kyā vār chhe? Māṭe rājī karavā hoy tene manḍavu.”
“How can we understand what the great Sant insists us to do?” Swami answered this question by reading from Vachanamrut Vartal-16: “One should do what is mentioned in this Vachanamrut. What is that? Worship God and keep the company of the Bhakta of God - these two are His only innermost wishes. If one is steadfast in these two, then how long will it really take to please Him? (Not long.) So if one wants to please Him, one should endeavour in these two.”
Vaat 1.112
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 112 · Chapter 1 · Verse 112
Gnānī hoy tene paṇ ṭāḍh, taḍako, bhūkh, taras ādik dehnā bhāv sarve jaṇāy, e paṇ samajavu.
Even a gnāni will experience the cold, heat, hunger, thirst and other physical conditions of the body.1 One should understand this. Footnotes: 1. 1. One who has attained the brāhmic state whilst being alive show hunger, thirst, etc. associated with the body, despite being above these qualities. They do not experience a disturbance within.
Vaat 1.113
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 113 · Chapter 1 · Verse 113
Priyvratne1 chhokarā thayā ne ātmārām bhāgvat kahevāṇā, kem je, Bhagwānnī kathā ne Bhagwānne vahālā evā je sādhu tenā sangno tyāg na karatā havā; te Janake2 kahyu je, “Mithilānagarīmā māru kāī baḷatu nathī,” paṇ chhokarā thayā; ne Govardhanbhāīne to sākar ne mīṭhu e bey sarakhā to paṇ chhokarā thayā; māṭe bheḷā rahe to chhokarā thāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Svāyambhuv Manunā putra. Nāradjīnā samāgamthī teo rājpāṭ chhoḍī sādhu thayā. Pachhī Brahmānī daramyāngīrīthī pāchhā sansārmā āvyā, chhatā man to tyāgī jevu ja hatu. Gṛuhastha hovā chhatā ātmārām ne mahābhāgwat kahevāyā. Jagatthī nirlep rahyā. (Bhāgwat: 7/1-2) 2. Mithilānā rājvanshīonu upnām ‘Janak’ kahevāy chhe. Eṭale Mithilānā badhā ja rājāo Janak kahevāyā. Sītājīnā pitā Siradhvaj nāmnā Janak hatā. (Viṣhṇu Purāṇ: 4/5/22-4)
Priyavrat had children; yet he was known as ‘ātmārām bhāgwat’ because he never abandoned the discourse of God and the Sadhu who is dear to God. Moreover, Janak said, “Nothing of mine is burning in the city of Mithilā.” Yet, he also had children. To Govardhanbhai, sugar and salt were the same; yet he had children. When one stays close [to a woman] (i.e., one is married), they will have children.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s purport here is that a gruhasth who has reached an elevated state may engage in their familial duties and have children, despite being aloof of such activities. Swami has praised Priyavat in other Swamini Vatos because he had a zeal for listening to discourses of God. Janak understood everything in this world as false. Gordhanbhai had conquered taste.
Vaat 1.114
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 114 · Chapter 1 · Verse 114
Bhagwān ane Moṭā Sādhune āshare karīne to vādaḷ jevā dukh āvavānā hoy te paṇ ṭaḷī jāy ne sādhan karīne to kūṭī kūṭīne marī jāy to paṇ na ṭaḷe.
By seeking refuge in God and his Sadhu, even intense miseries that are to befall on one are averted. However, even if one exhausts oneself through endeavours, they are still not averted.
Vaat 1.115
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 115 · Chapter 1 · Verse 115
Haiyāmā gnān bharyu chhe e to hajī bahār kāḍhyu nathī. Kem je, sāmbhaḷnārā āgaḷ pātra na maḷe. Ne e gnān to Brahmānī āyuṣhya paryant karīe to paṇ khūṭe nahi; paṇ te kahyānī to nivṛutti āvatī nathī.
The spiritual wisdom stored in my heart has not yet been fully revealed, since suitable recipients have not been found. And even if that spiritual wisdom is spoken for the period of Brahmā’s lifetime, it will not be exhausted. But time to tell it is not available.
Vaat 1.116
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 116 · Chapter 1 · Verse 116
“Indriyu-antahkaraṇnā dukh āvatā hoy tenu kem karavu?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “E to moṭā moṭāne paṇ āvatā, e to swabhāv kahevāy māṭe tenu sahan karavu.”
“What should one do about the pain brought by the indriyas and antahkaran?” Swami answered the question, “Even the great experienced misery because of them. That is called swabhāv and one should tolerate.”
Vaat 1.117
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 117 · Chapter 1 · Verse 117
“Moṭā chhe te koīkne vadhu sukh āpe chhe ne koīkne thoḍuk sukh āpe chhe tenu kem samajavu?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Moṭā to samudra jevā chhe. Te samudramā pāṇīnī khoṭ nathī; tem e to koīne ochhu sukh āpatā nathī, paṇ pātrane laīne em jaṇāy chhe. Ne uparthī to moṭā māṇasnu rākhavu paḍe evu garībnu na rakhāy, e to vahevār kahevāy je, Parvatbhāī jevā vānse bese ne moṭu māṇas hoy te āgaḷ bese.”
The great Sadhu gives more happiness to some and less to others. How should this be understood? In reply, he said, “The great are like an ocean, in which there is no shortage of water. The Sadhu does not give less happiness to people, but it appears that way to them due to the suitability of the recipient. Also, senior people have to be looked after – and this is not necessary for the meek. That is the way of the world. Meek people, like Parvatbhai, sit at the back and dignitaries sit at the front of the assembly.”
Vaat 1.118
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 118 · Chapter 1 · Verse 118
Mahārājnā swarūpmā vaḷagī rahevu ne agiyār niyam1 pāḷavā ne tyāgīne traṇ granth2 pāḷavā eṭalu karavu chhe; bīju kāī karavu nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. 1. Koīnī hinsā na karavī. 2. Parstrīno sang na karavo. 3. Māns na khāvu. 4. Dārū na pīvo. 5. Vidhavā strīno sparsha na karavo. 6. ātmahatyā na karavī. 7. Chorī na karavī. 8. Koīne kalank lagāḍī badnām na karavo. 9. Koī devnī nindā na karavī. 10. Bin-khaptu - hŏṭal vagerenu ane ḍungaḷī-lasaṇ-hingvāḷu na khāvu. 11. Bhagwān ane santthī vimukh jīv hoy tenā mukhethī kathā na sāmbhaḷvī. 2. Shikṣhāpatrī, Dharmāmṛut ane Niṣhkāmshuddhi.
Attach oneself to the manifest form of Maharaj. The householder should obey the eleven codes of conduct1 and the renunciant should observe the three scriptures.2 There is no need to do anything else. Footnotes: 1. 1. (1) Non-violence (2) Not to commit adultery (3) Not to eat meat (4) Not to drink alcohol (5) Not to touch widows (6) Not to commit suicide (7) Not to steal (8) Not to level false charges (9) Not to speak ill of or abuse any deities (10) Not to eat onions, garlic and other inedibles (11) Not to listen to even religious discourses from people who oppose God and God-realized Sadhus 2. Shikshapatri, Nishkam-Shuddhi, and Dharmamrut.
Vaat 1.119
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 119 · Chapter 1 · Verse 119
Koṭi janme kasar ṭaḷavānī hoy te āj ṭaḷī jāy ne brahmarūp karī mūke, jo kharekharā sādhu maḷe ne te kahe tem kare to.
If a true God-realized Sadhu is attained and one does as he says then the failings that would have taken tens of millions of births to overcome are overcome today and one becomes brahmarup.
Vaat 1.120
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 120 · Chapter 1 · Verse 120
Keṭlek rūpiye ānkhya, kān ādik indriyu maḷe nahi te Bhagwāne āpyā chhe, paṇ jīv kevaḷ kṛutaghnī chhe.
No amount of money can buy eyes, ears and other sense organs, but God has given them free. However, the jiva is forever ungrateful.
Vaat 1.121
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 121 · Chapter 1 · Verse 121
Koṭi kalpe Bhagwānnu dhām na maḷe, te āvā Sādhune hāth joḍe eṭalāmā maḷe chhe.
God’s abode cannot be obtained even after tens of millions of years, but is attained by merely folding one’s hands to such a God-realized Sadhu.
Vaat 1.122
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 122 · Chapter 1 · Verse 122
Bījā doṣhne Mahārāj gaṇatā nathī, paṇ chārnā drohne1 gaṇe chhe. Ek Bhagwān, bījā āchārya, trījā Sādhu ne chothā satsangī; māṭe e chārno droh na karavo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Droh ane aparādh ādhyātmik mārgmā vighnarūp chhe. Ajāṇtā thāy te aparādh ne jāṇī-būjīne thāy te droh. Droh ane aparādh man, vāṇī ne karmathī em traṇ prakāre thāy chhe. Aparādhīne ūgarvāno avakāsh chhe, drohī to asurmā ja khape chhe.
God overlooks other faults, but takes into account the insults against these four: God, āchārya, sadhus and satsangis. Therefore do not malign them.
Vaat 1.123
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 123 · Chapter 1 · Verse 123
Bhagwānnā swarūpnī niṣhṭhā thaī tene sādhan sarve thaī rahyā, bākī kāī karavu rahyu nathī.
One who has resolute faith in God (that he will grant liberation) has completed all endeavours. He has nothing more left to do.
Vaat 1.124
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 124 · Chapter 1 · Verse 124
Mahārāje kahyu hatu je, strīne chhokrā thāy te pachhī puruṣhmā het ochhu thaī jāy; tem Bhagwānnī mūrti dekhāy te pachhī pragaṭnī tāṇya jhājhī rahetī nathī.
Maharaj once said, “When a woman bears children, her love for her husband lessens. Similarly, when one is able to see the murti of God within, then the zeal for the manifest form of God does not remain.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami points out a subtle deficiency of an aspirant here. When one achieves the ability to see God internally, then the zeal for the manifest form of God - i.e., the Satpurush - does not remain. According to Maharaj and Swami’s principle, even when one achieves this state, the manifest form of God should remain predominant, because it is due to the manifest form of God that one is able to achieve the darshan of God within.
Vaat 1.125
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 125 · Chapter 1 · Verse 125
Ā lokmā ḍāhyo to koī Prabhu bhajato nathī ne je gānḍo thāy te bhaje chhe.
In this world, the intelligent do not worship God and one who becomes ‘mad’ does.
Vaat 1.126
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 126 · Chapter 1 · Verse 126
Bājaro khāvo ne Prabhu bhajavā, bīju kāī karavu nathī ne roṭalā to Bhagwānne devā chhe, Sādhune devā chhe, te deshe, deshe ne deshe.
Eat simple food and worship God. There is no need to do anything else. And God and his Sadhu want to give us food, so they will certainly give it.
Vaat 1.127
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 127 · Chapter 1 · Verse 127
Dharmashāḷānā kāmmā māṇase bahu dākhaḍo karyo, te ame rājī thayā, te Bhagwān rājī thaī rahyā. Ne āvā Sādhunu darshan to pancha-mahāpāpne paṇ bāḷī nākhe evu chhe, paṇ evo mahimā nathī ne evo mahimā hoy to antarmāthī ānandnā fuvārā chhūṭe. Ane ā te kāī vātu chhe! Ā to Akṣhardhāmnī vātu chhe, paṇ sānkhya vinā kasar rahī jāy chhe, ne sānkhyavāḷāne to ā lok sarve nark jevu lāge chhe, paṇ kyāī māl manāy nahi. Ne ā kārakhānu to sarve dhūḍyanu chhe, māṭe temā māl mānavo nahi.
Darshan of this Sadhu destroys even the five grave sins,1 but such glory is not realized. If one has realized such glory, fountains of joy will erupt from within. Are these merely talks? They are the talks of Akshardham. But without the knowledge of Sānkhya drawbacks remain. And to followers of the Sānkhya school of philosophy this world appears hellish. They do not believe it to have any value. In fact, to them all these workshops are of dust, therefore, do not believe them to be of any worth. Footnotes: 1. 1. The five grave sins are killing a Brahmin, drinking alcohol, stealing gold (or money), having illicit relations with the wife of one’s guru, company of one who engages in the any of the previous sins.
Vaat 1.128
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 128 · Chapter 1 · Verse 128
Bhagwānmā ne Sādhumā het raheshe to tenā upar sau het karashe ne ethī pratikūḷ raheshe tene to sau pratikūḷ thāshe, e vāt samajī rākhavī, emā to kāī sanshay nathī.
If one has love for God and his Sadhu, then one will be loved by everyone. But if one is against them, then all will turn against one. Remember this talk, there is no doubt in it.
Vaat 1.129
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 129 · Chapter 1 · Verse 129
Dukh koī mānasho nahi ne je joīe te āpaṇne maḷyu chhe, ne jhājhā rūpiyā āpe to Prabhu bhajāy nahī, te sāru āpatā nathī.
Do not feel miserable, for we have got what we want. If too much wealth is given, one forgets God and does not worship him. Therefore, he does not give it to us.
Vaat 1.130
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 130 · Chapter 1 · Verse 130
Mahāpralaynā agnimā paṇ vāsanā baḷī nahi. Te vāsanā to kāraṇ sharīrrūp je māyā te chhe. Tene ṭāḷavānu kāraṇ to e chhe je, ek to Bhagwānnī upāsanā ne bījī āgnā, te Shikṣhāpatrīmā kahyu chhe je, ‘Nijātmānam brahmarūpam’ em mānavu, e āgnā chhe. Te e vachanmā Mahārāje saune ekāntik karī mūkyā.
Innate desires (of the jiva to enjoy worldly pleasures) are not burnt even by the fire of the Great Dissolution. Innate desire is māyā in the form of the causal body. The means to overcome it is, first, the upāsanā of God and, second, the observance of God’s commands – that is to act as stated in the Shikshapatri (verse 116): Nijātmānam brahmarupam. With these words, Maharaj has made everyone become God-realized.
Vaat 1.131
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 131 · Chapter 1 · Verse 131
Durlabhmā durlabh satsang, ne durlabhmā durlabh ekāntikpaṇu, ne durlabhmā durlabh Bhagwān, e traṇ vāt āpaṇne maḷī rahī chhe. Sūkāī jāo, anna mūkī diyo, vanmā jāo ke ghar mūkī diyo te karatā paṇ ā Sādhunī vātu sāmbhaḷavī te adhik chhe, ane ā to Puruṣhottamnā vachan chhe ne guṇātīt vātu chhe ne ā vātumāthī to Akṣhardhām dekhāy chhe. Te Bhagwān Akṣhardhām ne muktane laīne evā ne evā ja āvyā chhe temā fer na samajavo, ne mahimā samajāto nathī tethī jīv dūbaḷo rahe chhe.
To attain Satsang is extremely rare, to attain spiritual enlightenment and to attain God is extremely rare. But we have attained all three. To listen to this Sadhu’s spiritual talks is better than totally emaciating one’s body, shunning food, living in the jungle and renouncing home. These are the words of Purushottam (supreme God) and the talks of Gunatit. By these talks we reach Akshardham.
Vaat 1.132
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 132 · Chapter 1 · Verse 132
Ek divase rāj devāy paṇ vidyā na devāy. Ne rājāno kuvar hoy tene game eṭalu khavarāve to paṇ ek divase moṭo na thāy. E to dhīre dhīre moṭo thāy, tem gnān paṇ sange karīne dhīre dhīre thāy chhe.
A kingdom can be given in one day, but not knowledge. Even by feeding a prince plenty of food, he does not grow up in one day. He grows slowly. Similarly, knowledge also develops slowly through association with the great Sadhu.
Vaat 1.133
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 133 · Chapter 1 · Verse 133
Jeṇe Moṭāne jīv āpī dīdho hoy tene paṇ vāsanā rahe, tene ṭāḷavānu sādhan to mahimā ne ātmaniṣhṭhā chhe.
One who has surrendered his jiva to the great Sadhu may also have some desires remaining. The means to overcome them are understanding his glory and knowledge of the ātmā.
Vaat 1.134
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 134 · Chapter 1 · Verse 134
Vāsanā ṭaḷe to paṇ dehno bhāv rahī jāy. Ṛuṣhabhdev Bhagwānno deh paḍavāno thayo tyāre mukhmā pāṇāno koḷiyo mūkyo, te shāthī je, khāvāno abhyās, māṭe e vāt paṇ samajavī.
Even if one’s desires are destroyed, consciousness to one’s body may still remain. When Rushabhdev Bhagwan was about to die, he put a stone in his mouth. Why? Because of the habit of eating. Therefore, this must also be understood.
Vaat 1.135
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 135 · Chapter 1 · Verse 135
Kadāpi rājī thaīne māthe be hāth mūkīe to paṇ gnān kem thāy? E to vāte karīne thāy. Ne rājī thāy to buddhi āpe tethī vāt samajāy.
Even if we become pleased and place two hands on the head (to bless), how is spiritual knowledge attained? That is gained through spiritual talks. And if pleased, we’ll give intelligence so that the talks can be understood by you.
Vaat 1.136
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 136 · Chapter 1 · Verse 136
Ā vātu to jādu chhe te sāmbhaḷe to gānḍo thāy. Te gānḍo te shu je, jagat khoṭu thaī jāy, pachhī tene ḍāhyo koṇ kahe?
These talks are magic – one who listens becomes mad! Mad in what sense? The world ceases to exist and is understood as perishable, then who will call one wise?
Vaat 1.137
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 137 · Chapter 1 · Verse 137
Indriyu-antahkaraṇ to Mumbaī ne Sūratnā taḷnā māṇas jevā chhe, tene satsang thāy nahī. Ne māhilo kajiyo to bahu bhāre chhe, te āḍo āve te jāṇe, e to Madhrāshīnā1 rangnī peṭhe māyānā pāsh lāgyā chhe tethī vāt aḍatī nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Madrāsīnā.
The senses and inner faculties are like the people of inner Mumbai and Surat – they will not take to satsang. Also, inner strife is extremely burdensome and is known to be obstructive. And like a Madrasi, whose dark skin does not lose its darkness, māyā has made an impact on the jiva and that is why satsang does not have an impact.
Vaat 1.138
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 138 · Chapter 1 · Verse 138
“Sādhane karīne kadāpi nirvāsanik thavāshe to paṇ shu pākyu? Ne teṇe karīne shu faḷ chhe? E to jhāḍavā jevo chhe. Ne Bhagwānnī niṣhṭhā chhe ne vāsanā chhe to paṇ tenī shī fikar chhe ne teno sho bhār chhe?” Ityādi bahu baḷnī vāt karī.
“So what if one becomes free of desires (nirvāsanik) by means of spiritual endeavors. And what fruit will they obtain from that? That is actually like trees (being free of desires). On the contrary, what worry does one who has faith in Bhagwan, despite some desires, have?” Swami talked a great deal on such talks of strength (of having faith in Bhagwan).
Vaat 1.139
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 139 · Chapter 1 · Verse 139
Bhagwānno āsharo thayo chhe te jevī to koī vāt ja nathī, tene to sarve vāt thaī rahī chhe. Kāī karavu bākī rahyu nathī. Ne Bhagwān to adhamoddhāraṇ chhe, patitpāvan chhe ne sharaṇāgat-vatsal chhe ne ‘Jāko jag me koī nahī, tāku tum ho Mahārāj’ Jenu koī nahi tenā Bhagwān chhe. Te Bhagwān to garībnā nivāj kahāve chhe. Ne ‘Pragaṭne bhajī bhajī pār pāmyā ghaṇā, gīdh gaṇikā kapivṛund koṭi; Vrajtaṇī nār vyabhichār-bhāve tarī, pragaṭ upāsanā sauthī moṭī.’ Māṭe pragaṭnā jevī to koī vāt nathī ne pragaṭ sūrya vate ajavāḷu thāy chhe. Māṭe pragaṭno āsharo thayo chhe te baḷ rākhavu.
There is nothing better for an aspirant than to take firm refuge in God. For such a person, everything has been achieved and he has nothing more left to do. God is the uplifter of the downtrodden, redeemer of the sinful and compassionately cares for all who surrender to him, “Jāko jagme koi nahi, tāku tum ho Mahārāj.” Meaning, for those who have no one, God is there to protect them. God is known as the shelter for the poor. And, Pragatne bhaji bhaji pār pāmyā ghanā, gidh ganikā kapivrund koti; Vrajtani nār vyabhichārbhāve tari, pragat upāsanā sauthi moti.1 Thus, there is nothing comparable to the talks of the manifest form of God. When the sun manifests, light spreads everywhere. And we have taken refuge of the manifest at present, so remain strong by the strength of that refuge. Footnotes: 1. 1. By worshipping the manifest human form of God, many have attained liberation e.g., Jatayu, the vulture; Lakshmibai, the prostitute of Jetalpur; the monkeys who helped Ram; and even the Gopis of Vrundavan, despite their adulterous feelings towards Shri Krishna, attained liberation. Thus, worship of the manifest is the best form of veneration.
Vaat 1.140
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 140 · Chapter 1 · Verse 140
Tapāsīne joyu to āpaṇe to viṣhayno sambandh hoy tyāre ja Prabhu bhajāy paṇ te vinā bhajāy nahi. Te khāvānu, rahevānu ādik sānukūḷ hoy to bhajāy.
Having analysed, we are only able to worship God when we have contact of the sense pleasures, but not in their absence. So, if food, shelter, etc. are convenient, God can be worshipped.
Vaat 1.141
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 141 · Chapter 1 · Verse 141
Ā jīv to viṣhaymāthī nokho paḍato nathī ne ā bhajan karāvīe chhīe temāthī jarāk paḷ, be paḷ nokho paḍe, temāthī nirguṇbhāvne pāmī jāy. Ne jīvne to ‘Vachanāmṛut’mā lambakarṇa jevo kahyo chhe, paṇ ā vartamān pāḷe chhe, e to jīv sārā hashe. Ne brahmānḍmā evo koī puruṣh nathī jene strī na joīe, ne evī koī strī nathī jene puruṣh na joīe, temāthī nokhā paḍavāno to Mahārāje ek shlok lakhyo chhe je, Nijātmānam brahmarūpam. Jem Gujarātnī pṛuthvīmā pātāḷ sudhī khodīe to paṇ pāṇo na maḷe, tem brahmarūp thāvu temā koī doṣh ja na maḷe.
This jiva does not distance itself from worldly pleasures, but because we make it offer devotion then it separates (from them) for a while. In this way, by detaching itself the jiva becomes pure. In the Vachanamrut, the jiva is described as a ‘donkey’. But those jivas who observe the codes of conduct must be good. In this universe there is no man who does not desire a woman and no woman who does not desire a man. To separate each from the other, Maharaj has written one shlok: ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam...’ i.e. believe one’s true self as ātmā, not the body. Just as there are no stones when one digs (the soil) of Gujarat deep down into the earth, similarly, there are no faults in one who is brahmarup.
Vaat 1.142
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 142 · Chapter 1 · Verse 142
More to Bhagwānne mumukṣhu khoḷatā ne āj to Bhagwān mumukṣhune khoḷe chhe.
Previously, spiritual aspirants sought God and today God searches for the spiritual aspirants.
Vaat 1.143
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 143 · Chapter 1 · Verse 143
Bhagwān bhajīe chhīe temāthī bahu ja moṭo lābh thāshe, te ek brahmānḍ jeṭalo na kahevāy ne so brahmānḍ jeṭalo paṇ na kahevāy.
We will get much benefit from worshipping God. It cannot be described as being equal to possession of one universe nor even a hundred universes.
Vaat 1.144
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 144 · Chapter 1 · Verse 144
Amārā bheḷā rahe chhe ne bīje māl māne chhe tene oḷakhāy nahi. Ne ā darshan thāy chhe te to bahu janmane puṇye thāy chhe; nīkar darshan thāy nahi. Ne ā to jem chhe tem jaṇāy to ā ghaḍīe gānḍā thāo. Ne gānḍā nathī thavātu te to Bhagwānnī ichchhā chhe. Ne ā darshan to bahu durlabh chhe paṇ varasād varase tyāre tenu māhātmya na jaṇāy paṇ na varase tyāre khabar paḍe. Ne varasād na varase tenu to dehne dukh thāy, ne ā yog na thāy tenu to jīvmā dukh thāy. Ne ā jog nahi thāy tene to pachhī rovu paḍashe.
Those who stay with us and yet place their faith elsewhere will not know. This darshan is due to the merits of many births, otherwise this darshan is not possible. This darshan is very rare. When it rains, we do not appreciate its importance, but when it does not rain we do. If it does not rain, there will be physical difficulty and if this association is not made, the jiva experiences spiritual misery. And those who do not associate with this Sadhu will have to cry later.
Vaat 1.145
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 145 · Chapter 1 · Verse 145
Dehne laīne, deshne laīne, kāḷne laīne jīv bahu glāni pāmī jāy chhe, e glāni pāmavī nahi. Ne eno to evo swabhāv chhe, ne karyu Bhagwānnu thāy chhe te game te kare. Ne sthūḷnu dukh āve,1 sūkṣhmanu dukh āve,2 kāraṇnu dukh āve3 tene mānavu nahi. Ne Mahārāje paṇ maḷatu rākhīne Prabhu bhajāvyā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sharīrmā mandavāḍ rahyā kare. 2. Manmā mūnjhvaṇ rahyā kare. 3. Viṣhaybhognī vāsanā rahyā kare.
The jiva becomes dejected due to the (adverse conditions of) body, place and time. One should not become so subdued, since that is their very nature. Everything happens by the will of God and he may do anything. Do not think about the miseries of the body,1 mind2 or innate desires.3 And Maharaj, too, made people worship according to their natural inclination. Footnotes: 1. 1. Illness, etc. 2. Worries, etc. 3. Desires for worldly pleasures.
Vaat 1.146
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 146 · Chapter 1 · Verse 146
Ā kārakhānā jo ek varasnā karīe to be varasnā ūbhā thāy, ne be varasnā karīe to chār varasnā ūbhā thāy em chhe. Ne sau manḍīe to Jūnāgaḍhthī Vartāl sudhī saḍak bāndhī daīe, te chhāyaḍe chālyā jāīe te taḍako ja na lāge paṇ vātu karavānu ne samajvānu chhe te rahī jāy. Ne Bhagwān vinā to ātmagnān, vairāgya ne dharma e sarve abhadra chhe, koī kalyāṇkartā nathī.
If we set up workshops to build mandirs, etc. for a year, they will run for two. And if we set up for two, they will run for four years. If all try, a road can be built right from Junagadh to Vartal on which we can walk in the shade and not feel the heat, but then these talks and this understanding will remain undone. Without knowing God, ātmā-realization, detachment and dharma are of no use, since none of them can give liberation.
Vaat 1.147
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 147 · Chapter 1 · Verse 147
Trīs lakṣhaṇe yukta sādhurūp Bhagwān1 jāṇavā ne ogaṇchālīs lakṣhaṇe yukta rājārūp Bhagwān2 jāṇavā. Bākī aishvaryapaṇe karīne Bhagwānpaṇu nathī. Ā vāt paṇ avashya samajvānī chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā trīs lakṣhaṇo: 1. Kṛupālu - svārthnī apekṣhā vinā pāraku dukh sahan na thāy te athavā pardukh ṭāḷvānī ichchhāvāḷo. 2. Sarvadehinām akṛutdroh - sarvadehīomā mitrādibhāv chhe māṭe koīno paṇ droh nahi karanār. 3. Titikṣhu - dvandvane sahan karanār. 4. Satyasār - satyane ja ek baḷ mānanār. 5. Anavadyātmā - dveṣh-asūyā ādi doṣhthī rahit manvāḷo. 6. Sam - sarvamā samdraṣhṭivāḷo. 7. Sarvopkārak - sarvane upakār ja karanār. 8. Kāmairahatadhī - viṣhay-bhogthī buddhimā kṣhobh nahi pāmanār. 9. Dānt - indriyonu daman karanār. 10. Mṛudu - mṛudu chittavāḷo. 11. Shuchi - bāhya ane āntar shuddhivāḷo, temā snān vagerethī thatī bāhya shuddhi ane Bhagwānnā chintanthī thatī āntar shuddhi kahī chhe. 12. Akinchan - anya prayojane rahit. 13. Anīh - laukik vyāpāre rahit koī paṇ prakārnī ichchhāe rahit. 14. Mitbhuk - mitāhār karanār. 15. Shānt - antahkaraṇ jenu niyammā chhe. 16. Sthir - sthirchittavāḷo. 17. Machchharaṇ - hu ja sharaṇ (rakṣhitā ane prāptino upāy) jene chhe. 18. Muni - shubhāshraynu manan karanār. 19. Apramatt - sāvadhān. 20. Gabhīrātmā - jeno abhiprāy jāṇī shakāy nahi te. 21. Dhṛutimā - āpatkāḷmā dhairyavāḷo. 22. Jitaṣhaḍguṇ - bhūkh, taras, shok, moh, jarā, mṛutyu e chha dvandvone jītanār. 23. Amānī - potānā dehnā satkārnī abhilāṣhā nahi rākhanār. 24. Mānad - bījāone mān āpanār. 25. Kalp - hitopadesh karavāmā samarth. 26. Maitra - koīne nahi ṭhagnāro. 27. Kāruṇik - karuṇāthī ja pravartanāro, paṇ svārtha ke lobhthī nahi. 28. Kavi - jīv, īshvar, māyā, Brahma ane Parabrahma - ā pāch tattvone yathārth jāṇanār. 29. Āgnāyaivam guṇān doṣhān mayādiṣhṭānapi swakān, dharmān santyajya yah sarvān mām bhajet - me Ved dvārā updesh karelā guṇdoṣhone jāṇīne, potānā sarva dharmono faḷ dvārā tyāg karīne, mane sarvabhāvthī bhajanār. 30. Gnātvā gnātvāth ye vai mām yāvān yashchāsmi yādrashah. Bhajantyananyabhāven - hu jevā swarūpvāḷo chhu, jevā swabhāvavāḷo chhu ane jeṭalī vibhūtivāḷo chhu, tevī rīte jāṇī jāṇīne eṭale vāramvār vichār karīne ananyabhāvthī mārī bhakti karanār. Evī rīte sādhunā trīs lakṣhaṇ kahyā chhe. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 11/11/29-33). 2. Bhagwānnā ogaṇchālīs lakṣhaṇo: 1. Satyam - sarva jīv-prāṇī-mātranu hit karavu, satya bolavu. 2. Shaucham - pavitratā, nirdoṣhpaṇu. 3. Dayā - anyanā dukho dūr karavānī vṛutti. 4. Kṣhāntihi - aparādhīonā aparādh sahan karavā. 5. Tyāgah - yāchako pratye udārtā athavā Parmātmāne ātm-samarpaṇ. 6. Santoṣhah - sadāy kleshe rahitpaṇu. 7. Ārjavam - man, vāṇī ane sharīrnu ekrūppaṇu. Eṭale jevu manmā tevu ja vāṇīmā ane tevī ja kriyā karavī; arthāt saraḷtā. 8. Shamah - manno saiyam. 9. Damah - ānkh vagere bāhya indriyo par saiyam. 10. Tapah - sharīr tathā manne klesh thāy tevā vratādi karavā. 11. Sāmyam - shatru-mitra pratye samān bhāv. 12. Titikṣhā - sukh-dukh jevā dvandvothī parābhav nahi pāmavāpaṇu, sahanshakti. 13. Uparatihi - adhik lābh tathā prāpti pratye udāsīntā. 14. Shrutam - sarva shāstrārthnu yathārth jāṇavāpaṇu. 15. Gnānam - āshritonā aniṣhṭanī nivṛutti ane īṣhṭanī prāpti karī āpavāmān upyogī gnān athavā jīv, īshvar, māyā, Brahma tathā Parbrahmanī anubhavpūrṇa jāṇkārī. 16. Viraktihi - vairāgya, viṣhaymā nihspṛuhapaṇu athavā viṣhayothī chittanu ākarṣhaṇ na thavāpaṇu. 17. Aishvaryam - sarva jīv-prāṇīnu niyantāpaṇu. 18. Shauryam - shūrvīrpaṇu. 19. Tejah - prabhāv, eṭale koīthī paṇ parābhav na pāmavāpaṇu. 20. Balam - kalyāṇkārī guṇone dhāraṇ karavānu sāmarthya. 21. Smṛutihi - potānāmā ananyabhāve premthī joḍāyel bhaktonā aparādhone na jotā temane kṣhaṇmātra na bhūle. Temanā guṇonu smaraṇ kare. 22. Svātantryam - anyanī apekṣhāthī rahitpaṇu. 23. Kaushalam - nipuṇpaṇu. 24. Kāntihi - ādhyātmik tej. 25. Dhairyam - sarvadā avyākuḷtā. 26. Mārdavam - chittanī komaḷtā athavā krūrtāe rahitpaṇu. 27. Prāgalbhyam - pīḍhatā, gnānnī gambhīrtā. 28. Prashrayah - vinayshīltā, gnān-garībāī. 29. Shīlam - sadāchār. 30. Sahah - prāṇnu niyaman-sāmarthya. 31. Ojah - brahmacharyathī prāpta karel divya kānti. 32. Balam - kalyāṇkārī guṇone dhāraṇ karavānu sāmarthya. 33. Bhagah - gnānādi guṇonī adhiktā. 34. Gāmbhīryam - gnānnu ūnḍāṇ, āchhakalāpaṇāthī rahit athavā abhiprāy n jāṇī shakāy te. 35. Sthairyam - krodh thavānā nimitta sate paṇ vikār na thāy te athavā chanchaḷtāno abhāv. 36. āstikyam - shāstrārthamā vishvās athavā Bhagwān sadākartā, sākār, sarvoparī ane pragaṭ chhe tevī draḍh shraddhā. 37. Kīrtihi - yash. 38. Mānah - pūjānī yogyatā. 39. Anahamkṛutihi ahankārno abhāva, nirmānīpaṇu. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 1/16/26-28)
Know that God in the form of a sadhu has 30 qualities1 and God in the form of a king has 39 qualities.2 But Godliness is not due to miraculous powers. This, too, must be firmly understood. Footnotes: 1. 1. Described in the Shrimad Bhagvat 11/11/29-32: (1) krupālu - one who selflessly showers grace upon others; (2) sarvedehinām akrutadroh - one who does not harm any living being; (3) titikshu - one who remains equipoise in all situations - such as in the duality of praise and insult, happiness and misery, hunger and thirst, etc.; (4) satyasār - one whose strength comes from satya; (5) anavadhyātmā - one who is devoid of jealousy or other such vices; (6) sam - one who views others with equality; (7) sarvopakārak - one who does only good to others; (8) kāmairahatadhihi - one whose mind is not disturbed by indulging in vishays; (9) dānt - one whose indriyas are restrained; (10) mrudu - gentle-natured; (11) shuchi - one with inner and outer purity; (12) akinchan - one without any worldly desires; (13) aniha - one without any desires for worldly gains; (14) mitabhuk - one who eats in moderation; (15) shānt - one whose mind is restrained; (16) sthir - one who is equipoise; (17) machchharan - one whose only refuge is God; (18) muni - one who has noble thoughts; (19) apramatta - one who is aware; (20) gambhirātmā - one whose motives are beyond our understanding; (21) dhrutimān - one who is patient even in difficult circumstances; (22) jitashadguna - one who has defeated: thirst, hunger, grief, infatuation, old age and death; (23) amāni - one with humility; (24) mānad - one who can praise others; (25) kalp - one who has the ability to speak for others’ benefit; (26) maitra - one who does not deceive others; (27) kārunik - one who is compassionate without any selfish motive; (28) kavi - One who fully knows the animate, the inanimate and God; (29) one who worships God; (30) one who has single-minded worship with the realization of God in His true glory. 2. Described in the Shrimad Bhagvat 1/16/26-30: (1) satya - truthfulness or benevolence to all beings; (2) sauch - [inner] purity, i.e., flawlessness; (3) dayā - compassion, i.e., intolerance of others’ pain; (4) kshānti - forbearance, i.e., tolerance of contempt from adversaries; (5) tyāg - renunciation, i.e., forsaking of all things, including one's self; (6) santosh - contentment, i.e., free from restlessness; (7) ārjav - sincerity, i.e., congruence of mind (thoughts), speech (words) and body (actions); (8) sham - tranquility, i.e., restraint of mind; (9) dam - self-control, i.e., restraint of outer sense organs; (10) tap - austerity, i.e., contemplation upon the creation of the world; (11) sāmya - equality, i.e., equal behaviour with friends and foe; (12) titikshā - endurance, i.e., withstanding of comforts and hardships; (13) uparati - abstinence, i.e., refraining from unnecessary activities; (14) shrut - learning, i.e., knowledge of the precise meanings of the scriptures; (15) gnān - knowledge, i.e., knowledge useful in helping aspirants attain the desirable and avoid the undesirable; (16) virakti - disaffection, i.e., devoid of attraction to the pleasures of the sense enjoyments; (17) aishvarya - power, i.e., control over all things; (18) shaurya - valour, i.e., boldness in battle; (19) tej - brilliance, i.e., resistance to defeat; (20) bal - strength, i.e., power to govern all beings; (21) smruti - memory, i.e., remembering of devotees’ favours in their times of faltering; (22) swātantrya - independence; (23) kaushal - expertise; (24) kānti - lustre; (25) dhairya - fortitude, i.e., strength of mind in adverse times; (26) mārdav - suppleness, i.e., modesty; (27) prāgalbhya - courage; (28) prashray - courtesy; (29) sheel - chastity, i.e., purity of character; (30) saha - potency; (31) ojas - vitality; (32) bal - strength, i.e., power to support all things; (33) bhag - excellence; (34) gāmbheerya - profundity; (35) sthairya - stability; (36) āstikya - faith in God and scriptures; (37) keerti - glory; (38) mān - self-respect; (39) anahamkruti - egolessness, i.e., humility.
Vaat 1.148
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 148 · Chapter 1 · Verse 148
Antarmā ṭāḍhu rahyā kare ne dhagī na jāy tenā be upāy chhe: ek to Bhagwānnu bhajan karavu ne bīju Bhagwānne sarva-kartā samajavā ne temā sukh āve to sukh bhogavī levu ne dukh āve to dukh bhogavī levu. Te kahyu chhe je, Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoy nahi, jem karashe tem sukh ja thāshe.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhāvārth: Bhagwān potānā dās eṭale ke bhaktanā shatru kyāreya hotā ja nathī. Te je kaī kare chhe te bhaktanā sārā māṭe ja kare chhe. Ā vāt Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīnā ‘Dāsnā dushman te Hari hoye nahi’ padmā ullekhāyelī chhe. Kīrtan Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoye nahi, Bhāī je kāī karashe te sukh thāshe; Aṇasamaje aṭpaṭu e lāge kharu, Paṇ samazīne juve to satya bhāse... Dās. 1 Bhāī sukhmā Hari kaho kene sāmbharyā, Jo dhan rāj ne parivār pāme; Rājnā sājmā Rāmjī visare, Vaḷī mālnā madnā madmā matta vāme... Dās. 2 Bhāī sansārnā sukh te dukh chhe dāsne, Teh Hari vichārīne nahī ja āpe; Paṇ jaktanā jīv te jukti jāṇe nahi, Aṇachhatā dāsnā doṣh sthāpe... Dās. 3 Bhāī dehtaṇu dukh teh sukh chhe santne, Jo akhanḍ varati vaḷī em rahe; Niṣhkuḷānand e dayā Nāthnī jāṇaje, Je samajyā te to em ja kahe... Dās. 4 [Kīrtan Sār Sangrah: 2/456]
There are two means by which inner peace remains and no agitation arises: one is to worship God and the other is to understand God as the all-doer. Then, if we get happiness we should enjoy it and if we encounter misery we should tolerate it. It is said, “Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’di hoy nahi, jem karashe tem sukh ja thāshe.”1 – “God is not an enemy of the devotee, whatever he does will bring happiness.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Essence: God is not an enemy of his devotees. Whatever he does is for their benefit. This has been mentioned by Nishkulanand Swami in his kirtan Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoye nahi. Kīrtan Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoye nahi, Bhāī je kāī karashe te sukh thāshe; Aṇasamaje aṭpaṭu e lāge kharu, Paṇ samazīne juve to satya bhāse... Dās. 1 Bhāī sukhmā Hari kaho kene sāmbharyā, Jo dhan rāj ne parivār pāme; Rājnā sājmā Rāmjī visare, Vaḷī mālnā madnā madmā matta vāme... Dās. 2 Bhāī sansārnā sukh te dukh chhe dāsne, Teh Hari vichārīne nahī ja āpe; Paṇ jaktanā jīv te jukti jāṇe nahi, Aṇachhatā dāsnā doṣh sthāpe... Dās. 3 Bhāī dehtaṇu dukh teh sukh chhe santne, Jo akhanḍ varati vaḷī em rahe; Niṣhkuḷānand e dayā Nāthnī jāṇaje, Je samajyā te to em ja kahe... Dās. 4 [Kīrtan Sār Sangrah: 2/456]
Vaat 1.149
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 149 · Chapter 1 · Verse 149
Bhagwāne moh shā sāru karyo hashe? Em sankalp karīne tapās karyo to jaṇāṇu je, e paṇ samajīne karyu chhe, nīkar to brahmānḍ chālat nahi.
Why has God created attraction for the opposite sex? With this thought we analysed and found that it was done purposely. Otherwise the universe would not function.
Vaat 1.150
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 150 · Chapter 1 · Verse 150
Muktānand Swāmīmā het thāy nahi ne bhūnḍaṇ jevī ḍoshī hoy temā het thāy; kem je, daivnī māyāno moh ja evo chhe.
One does not develop affection for Muktanand Swami, yet develops affection for an ugly woman. The reason is the infatuation caused by God’s māyā.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is showing the strength of lust with these words. When one is overcome with lust, beauty is of no concern.
Vaat 1.151
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 151 · Chapter 1 · Verse 151
Moṭāne viṣhe sadbhāv e ja nirvāsanikpaṇāno hetu chhe ne Moṭāne viṣhe asadbhāv e ja vāsanāno hetu chhe. Ane Bhagwān oḷakhāṇā, Sādhu oḷakhāṇā te samajī rahyā, have kāī dhroḍ karavo nahi.
Goodwill towards the great Sadhu is the only way to overcome worldly desires, while enmity towards the great engulfs one in desires to enjoy worldly pleasures. God and his Sadhu have been recognized and understood, so now there is no need to run around.
Vaat 1.152
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 152 · Chapter 1 · Verse 152
Mokṣhane arthe to Bhagwān ne Sādhu e be ja chhe ne bījā sādhannu faḷ to dharma, artha ne kām chhe.
For attaining moksha, there is only God and his holy Sadhu. The fruit of other spiritual endeavours is dharma, wealth and fulfilment of desires.
Vaat 1.153
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 153 · Chapter 1 · Verse 153
Swāminārāyaṇ nāmnā mantra jevo bījo koī mantra āj baḷiyo nathī ne e mantre kāḷā nāgnu paṇ zer na chaḍe ne e mantre viṣhay ūḍī jāy chhe, brahmarūp thāy chhe ne kāḷ, karma, māyānu bandhan chhūṭī jāy chhe, evo bahu baḷiyo e mantra chhe. Māṭe nirantar bhajan karavu.
Today, there is no mantra more powerful than the Swaminarayan mantra. It makes even the poison of a black cobra ineffective and dispels the desire for material pleasures. With it, one becomes brahmarup and is freed from the bondage of kāl, karma and māyā. That is how powerful this mantra is. Therefore, always chant it.
Vaat 1.154
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 154 · Chapter 1 · Verse 154
Lākaḍā, pāṇā, īnṭāḷā, māṇas emā saune devnī māyāno moh thayo chhe paṇ Bhagwānnī mūrti āgaḷ to ā sarve kāḷnu bhakṣh chhe. Ane kathā chhe e Bhagwānnī mūrti chhe, te thakī samajaṇnī draḍhatā thāy chhe, māṭe eno abhyās rākhavo.
All are drawn to the māyā of the gods in the form of wood, stone, bricks and man. But compared to the murti of God, they will all perish with time. Spiritual discourses are the body of God. Through them, one’s understanding is strengthened. Therefore, they should be studied.
Vaat 1.155
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 155 · Chapter 1 · Verse 155
Narnārāyaṇānand Swāmī e Narnārāyaṇ chhe, teṇe traṇ varas sudhī ḍoshiyunī sabhāmā Burānpurmā vātu kariyu. Tenī Mahārāje Narnārāyaṇ kahīne pūjā karī ne tenā dīkarā Yogānand Swāmī ne Lṛuṣhṇānand Swāmī; māṭe gṛuhasthāshrammā rahe to chhokarā paṇ thāy. E to moṭā moṭā paṇ sau sansārmā rahīne āvyā chhe.
Narnarayanand Swami is Narnarayan. He discoursed to women in Burānpur for three years. Maharaj called him Narnarayan and performed his puja. His sons are Yoganand Swami and Krushnanand Swami. So, if one was a gruhasth (prior to becoming a sadhu), he may have had children. Even the great came here (i.e., renounced and became sadhus) after they married.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The message here is the same as in Swamini Vat 1/113. One who follows the path of gruhashtāshram may have children. However, they can still attain an elevated state. Swami gives the example of Narnarayanand Swami who had children prior to becoming a sadhu.
Vaat 1.156
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 156 · Chapter 1 · Verse 156
Chār prakārnā satsangī, temā pratham sau karatā saras ātmā ne Paramātmānā gnānvāḷo; ne te pachhī bījo dhyān ane prītivāḷo, teṇe karīne joḍāyo hoy to te pār paḍe; ne te keḍe trījo āgnāvāḷo, te āgnāmā rahīne mānḍ-mānḍ pūru kare, te paṇ pār paḍe to te ṭhīk chhe; ne te keḍe chotho te koīk sādhumā het thayu hoy teṇe karīne koīk rīte nabhe. E rīte chār prakārnā bhaktanā rūp kahyā. Te pachhī harijane prashna pūchhyo je, “Chār prakārnā bhaktamā pratham kahyo je gnānī tene koī prakārnu vighna āve ke na āve?” Pachhī teno uttar karyo je, “Koīk dhakko māre ne pachhī paḍī jāy ne pāchho ūbho thāy chhe. Ne vaḷī jem chomāsāmā paḍe chhe ne ūbho thāy chhe, tem vichāre karīne desh-kāḷne ṭāḷī nākhe ne desh-kāḷ to āve kharo; e uttar chhe.”
There are four types of satsangis: “The first and best of them all is the one with knowledge of ātmā and Paramatma. Second is one who meditates and has love. Through his attachment for meditation and love for God and his sadhus in this way, he will succeed in attaining moksha. The third is one who follows the commands of God and just about makes it. And if he succeeds that is fine. The fourth is one who attaches himself to some sadhu and as a result somehow survives in Satsang.” Swami thus described the nature of the four types of devotees. Then a devotee asked, “Of the four types of devotees described, does the first, the spiritually wise, encounter any difficulties?” The answer, “If someone pushes, one falls and gets up again. In the rain one slips and gets up again. Similarly, obstacles due to adverse time and place are controlled by proper thinking, but obstacles due to difficult place and time do arise. That is the answer.”
Vaat 1.157
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 157 · Chapter 1 · Verse 157
Koṭi kalpe paṇ gnān karyā vinā chhūṭako nathī, te shu je, ‘Nijātmānam brahmarūpam’ e Shikṣhāpatrīnā shlokmā kahyu chhe em mānavu. Jem Gujarātnī pṛuthvīmā pāṇo na āve, tem haribhaktane to viṣhay kahevāy nahi. Ene to āgnā chhe.
Even after countless years, there is no choice but to gain spiritual knowledge, which is the knowledge written in the Shikshapatri shlok - ‘Nijātmānam brahmarūpam’ - believe the pragat Satpurush is one’s ātmā.
Vaat 1.158
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 158 · Chapter 1 · Verse 158
Bhagwān maḷyā hot paṇ āvā Sādhu na maḷyā hot to āṭalo dākhaḍo karīne koṇ samajāvat? Ne Mahārājnā satsangī karatā paṇ ā Sādhunā satsangī adhik chhe.
If one had attained God, but not such a Sadhu, who would have put in such efforts and explained the glory and greatness of God? Therefore, the devotees of this Sadhu are more fortunate than even the devotees of Maharaj.
Vaat 1.159
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 159 · Chapter 1 · Verse 159
Kathā vanchāvtā vāt āvī je, Vyāsjīne shānti na thaī. Te upar bolyā je, “Āpaṇne Bhagwān maḷyā ane Bhagwān jevā Sādhu maḷyā to paṇ shānti thatī nathī. Tenu kāraṇ e chhe je, ek to viṣhaymā rāg ne bīju Bhagwānnī āgnā pramāṇe vartāy nahi ne trīju agnān, teṇe karīne shānti thatī nathī.”
During a reading of the scriptures, it was mentioned that Vyasji did not attain peace. Explaining this, Swami said, “We have attained God and the God-like Sadhu, still we do not feel at peace. The reasons: first, a strong desire for worldly pleasures; second, inability to act according to the commands of God; and third, ignorance. Because of these, peace is not experienced.”
Vaat 1.160
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 160 · Chapter 1 · Verse 160
Moṭā moṭā sarve sādhuno sang karavo. Tenu kāraṇ e chhe je, koīkmā ek guṇ hoy, koīkmā be guṇ hoy ne koīkmā traṇ guṇ hoy, te sarvenā sangmāthī te te guṇ āve. Ne sarva-guṇ-sampanna ek maḷe to to kāī vāndho ja na rahe. Paṇ evā jhājhā hoy nahi.
Associate with the great sadhus. Since, some of them will have one virtue, some will have two virtues and some will have three virtues. Thus, by associating with them all, we acquire the particular virtues they have. And if one finds a sadhu who is complete with all virtues, then no flaws will remain. But there are not many like that.
Vaat 1.161
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 161 · Chapter 1 · Verse 161
Sūryane konī upamā devāy? E to ek ja. Tem Bhagwān paṇ ek ja. Ane anant avatār te sarve ek Bhagwānnun dīdhu aishvarya pāmyā chhe. Āvo samo pṛuthvī upar āvyo nathī ne āvashe paṇ nahi, ne ā Sādhu paṇ āvyā nathī ne āvashe paṇ nahi, ne ā Bhagwān paṇ āvyā nathī ne āvashe paṇ nahi. Anant avatār thaī gayā ne anant avatār thāshe paṇ ā Sādhu ne ā Bhagwān te āvyā nathī ne āvashe paṇ nahi.
Who can the Sun be compared with? It is one of a kind. Similarly, God is also one of a kind. And the countless avatārs have all attained the powers given by this one God. This opportunity has not arisen on earth before and will not come again. Even this Sadhu has not come on earth and will not come again, and this God has not come and will not come again. There have been infinite avatārs and there will be countless more avatārs, but this Sadhu and God have not come before and will not come again.
Vaat 1.162
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 162 · Chapter 1 · Verse 162
Akṣhardhāmmāthī ānhī pote Puruṣhottam jīvnā kalyāṇ karavāne swatantrapaṇe āve ne anant jīvno mokṣha karīne chālyā jāy.
Purushottam himself has descended here from Akshardham of his own wish. He liberates countless jivas and departs.
Vaat 1.163
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 163 · Chapter 1 · Verse 163
Alabhya lābh maḷyo chhe ane ātyantik muktine pāmyā chhīe ane āj to satsangnī bharjuvānī chhe ne āj to sheraḍīnā sāṭhāno vachalo bhāg āpaṇne maḷyo chhe. Temā ras ghaṇo ne sugam paṇ chhe.
This is an incredible opportunity and we have attained ultimate liberation. Today satsang is in the peak of its youth. We have received the central (soft and juicy) portion of the sugarcane. There is a lot of juice in it and is convenient to eat.
Vaat 1.164
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 164 · Chapter 1 · Verse 164
Kām-krodhādik doṣh chhe te to jem khīl ke dādar hoy evā chhe, te to dehno bhāv chhe, ṭaḷī jāshe ne Moṭā draṣhṭi kare to ā ghaḍīe ṭaḷī jāy, paṇ Moṭāno avaguṇ e kṣhayrog jevo chhe.
Vicious natures such as lust, anger, etc. are like pimples and ringworm! They are consequences of having a body. But they will be conquered. And if the great Sadhu showers his blessings, they will be overcome this instant. But to perceive flaws in the great Sadhu is like tuberculosis.
Vaat 1.165
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 165 · Chapter 1 · Verse 165
Ek to Bhagwānnī āgnā pāḷavī ane bīju santnu swarūp samajavu ane trīju Bhagwānnu swarūp samajavu, e traṇ vātmā Bhagwān rājī, rājī ne rājī chhe; ne tene dhanya chhe, dhanya chhe ne dhanya chhe. E traṇ vāt rākhavī.
Three things really please God. First, following his wishes; second, understanding the Sadhu's form; and third, understanding the form of God. Such a person is to be truly, truly, truly commended. Therefore, adopt these three methods.
Vaat 1.166
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 166 · Chapter 1 · Verse 166
Ā satsang maḷyo chhe e to param chintāmaṇi maḷī chhe, temā jīv bahu vṛuddhine pāme chhe.
This satsang we have attained is the best chintāmani. With it, the jiva will make great progress.
Vaat 1.167
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 167 · Chapter 1 · Verse 167
Āsharānu rūp kahyu ke, “Koīk āpaṇā mandirmā kālno āvelo hoy ne te māndo paḍe ne vīs varas māndo rahe to paṇ enī chākarī āpaṇe karavī paḍe. Ne vaḷī jem gṛuhasthnā bāyaḍī-chhokarāne teno āsharo chhe te desh-pardeshmā jaīne tenī khabar rākhe chhe, tem Bhagwān potānā āshritnī khabar rākhe chhe.”
Just as a mother and children seek refuge of the husband, who cares for them whether he is at home or abroad, similarly, God cares for his followers.
Vaat 1.168
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 168 · Chapter 1 · Verse 168
Sarve vāt Sādhu vate chhe, māṭe tene mukhya rākhavā paṇ Sādhu gauṇ thāy ne gnān pradhān thaī jāy em na karavu.
Everything is gained through the Sadhu. Therefore, keep him predominant. But do not let him become secondary and knowledge become the main aim.
Vaat 1.169
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 169 · Chapter 1 · Verse 169
Mahimā samajāy chhe ne farī bhūlī javāy chhe, māṭe so vār vānche-sāmbhaḷe to pachhī bhulāy nahi. Ne Mahārāj chhatā het bahu hatu ne āj gnān adhik chhe, ne ghaṇāk sanskārī jīv āvyā chhe, māṭe Sādhumā het tarat thaī jāy chhe.
The glory of God is understood and again forgotten. However, by reading and listening to it a hundred times it is not forgotten. And many virtuous jivas have come into Satsang, who instantly develop love for the Sadhu.
Vaat 1.170
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 170 · Chapter 1 · Verse 170
Moṭā moṭā sarve sādhu hoy ane Shvetdvīp jevu sthānak hoy ne Brahmānā kalp paryant āvardā hoy ne sarveno sang karīne tenā guṇ shīkhe to satsang thāy, ne vāsanā paṇ tyāre ṭaḷe evī chhe. Ane e kahyā e sarvenā guṇ ekne viṣhe hoy evāno sang maḷe to to sarve guṇ āve ne vāsanā paṇ ṭaḷī jāy. Te sang āj āpaṇne maḷyo chhe.
If all the great sadhus are present, the place is like Shvetdwip, the lifespan is as long as one kalpa of Brahma and if one associates with all, learning their virtues, only then satsang develops, and worldly desires are overcome. If all these virtues described are found in one Sadhu and one attains close association with him then one attains all virtues and desires are also overcome. We have attained such an association today.
Vaat 1.171
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 171 · Chapter 1 · Verse 171
Ek to yagna kare te ākhī pṛuthvīmā ghoḍo ferave temā bahu dākhaḍo, kem je, koīk bāndhe to yagna adhūro rahe. Ne ek to faḷiyāmā ghoḍo farevīne yagna karī le. Temā shu kahyu je, “Indriyu-antahkaraṇ tene vash karavā e to pṛuthvīmā ghoḍo feravvā jevu chhe, ne potāne brahmarūp mānavu e to faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravvā jevu chhe. Ane vaḷī, chosaṭh lakṣhaṇ sādhunā kahyā chhe1 te shīkhavā e to pṛuthvīmā ghoḍo feravvā jevu kaṭhaṇ chhe ne chosaṭh lakṣhaṇvāḷā sādhumā joḍāvu e to faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravvā jevu sugam chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit, 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37]
For one who performs (an Ashwamedh) yagna and rides a horse throughout the world it is very difficult, since if someone captures the horse the yagna will remain incomplete. While another, who rides the horse in the compound, completes the yagna. The meaning of this is, “Controlling the senses and inner faculties is like riding the horse throughout the world. While, believing oneself as brahmarup is like riding the horse in the compound. Also, imbibing the 64 qualities of a sadhu is like riding the horse throughout the world. But, associating with a sadhu who has the 64 qualities1 is convenient, like riding the horse in the compound.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The 64 qualities of a sadhu (as mentioned in the Satsangijivan/Harigita: 1/25-37) are, one who: 1. Is compassionate, 2. Is forgiving, 3. Wishes the betterment of all jivas, 4. Tolerates cold, heat, etc., 5. Does not look at the flaws in others’ virtues, 6. Is tranquil, 7. Does not have an enemy, 8. Is devoid of jealousy and animosity, 9. Is free of ego and envy, 10. Honors others, Expand all qualities 11. Speaks kindly and truthfully, 12. Is free of lust, anger, greed, and arrogance, 13. Is free of I-ness and my-ness, 14. Is firm in one’s personal dharma, 15. Is free of pretentiousness, 16. Maintains physical and mental purity, 17. Punishes his body and indriyas, 18. Possesses an agreeable nature, 19. Speaks only as necessary, 20. Has control over the indriyas and free of laziness, 21. Is free from the duality of happiness and misery, 22. Possesses patience, 23. Is free from over-activity of karma-indriyas and gnan-indriyas, 24. Does not collect material objects, 25. Is an expert in instruction, 26. Possesses ātmā-realization, 27. Benefits everyone, 28. Is free of all types of fear, 29. Is free from any expectations , 30. Is free of addictions, 31. Possesses faith, 32. Is generous, 33. Is austere, 34. Is free of sin, 35. Does not listen to gossip, 36. Constantly engages in scriptural study, 37. Is free from indulging in worldly pleasures, 38. Possesses a theist intellect, 39. Possesses discretion of truth and false, 40. Is free of alcohol and meat consumption, 41. Is firm in observances of vrats, 42. Does not gossip, 43. Is free of deceit, 44. Does not reveal other’s secrets, 45. Has conquered sleep, 46. Has conquered taste, 47. Is content, 48. Has a stable mind, 49. Is inclined toward nonviolence, 50. Has no desires, 51. Has equanimity in happiness and misery, 52. Is ashamed in doing misdeeds, 53. Does not compliment himself, 54. Does not slander others, 55. Observes celibacy perfectly, 56. Has self-control and restraint, 57. Has complete control of his body, 58. Has control of his breath (and thus internal faculties), 59. Has firm refuge of God, 60. Is inclined toward devotion of God, 61. Does all activities for God’s sake, 62. Is inclined to remain in meditation of God’s murti, 63. Listens to God’s divine incidents, 64. Does not let one second pass without devotion to God.
Vaat 1.172
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 172 · Chapter 1 · Verse 172
Tap karīne baḷī jāy to paṇ jo Bhagwānno āsharo na hoy to Bhagwān teḍavā na āve ne hinḍoḷā-khāṭmā sūī rahe ne dūdh-sākar ne chokhā jame ne sevānā karanārā ne raḷnārā bījā hoy to paṇ tene antsame vimānmā besārīne Bhagwān teḍī jāy, jo Bhagwānno draḍh āsharo hoy to. Māṭe mokṣhanu kāraṇ āsharo chhe.
One may be burnt out by performing austerities, but if one does not have firm refuge in God then he will not come to take when one passes away. And even if one sleeps comfortably on a swing, and eats sweetened milk and rice while others serve him, still, if his refuge is firm, God will seat him in a divine chariot and take him. Therefore, the cause of moksha is refuge in God.
Vaat 1.173
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 173 · Chapter 1 · Verse 173
Navrāsh hoy tyāre Bhagwānnī mūrtine laīne besavu. Te mūrti te shu je, Bhagwānnī kathā, kīrtan, vārtā ne dhyān e Bhagwānnī mūrti chhe. Ne deh hoy tyā lobh, kām, krodh, svād, sneh, mān ne nidrā e sarve hoy chhe. Tene to deh bheḷā karī rākhavā. Te to jem koīk afīṇnu vyasan rākhe chhe te sukh jevu jaṇāy chhe paṇ e to dehne dukh de evu chhe, em samajavu.
When free, sit with the murti of God. What is that murti? Discourses, bhajans, talks and meditation of God are God’s murti. And because one possesses a body, one will have greed, lust, anger, craving for taste, affection toward relatives, ego, and inclination to sleep. These should be considered as the qualities of the body. This is similar to one who has an addiction to morphine and he experiences happiness in that; however, it causes misery to the body.1 One should understand as such. Footnotes: 1. 1. Addictions provide temporary happiness and eventually cause misery to the body. Similarly, the base natures (anger, ego, greed, etc.) may provide happiness but ultimately leads to misery.
Vaat 1.174
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 174 · Chapter 1 · Verse 174
Āpaṇe to chhello janma thaī rahyo chhe. Te chhello janma te shu je, prakṛutinā kāryamā mane karīne māl na mānavo e ja chhello janma chhe.
This is our last birth. What understanding makes this the last birth? To believe that the work of Prakruti has no worth, that is the last birth.
Vaat 1.175
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 175 · Chapter 1 · Verse 175
Koīk māṇasnu koīke jarāk rākhyu hoy to te paṇ nathī bhūlatu, to Bhagwānne arthe āpaṇe kāīk karyu hoy ke karīe to te kem bhūle? E Bhagwān to kāī bhūle evā nathī. Ne Bhagwānnī dayā to apār chhe ne sarva ṭhekāṇe tyāthī ja dayā āvī chhe.
People do not forget even the little help given to them by others. So, if we have done or do something for God, how can he forget? God is not the type to forget. The grace of God is limitless and compassion everywhere has come from him.
Vaat 1.176
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 176 · Chapter 1 · Verse 176
Bhagwān maḷyā, Sādhu maḷyā, te have haiyāmā dukh āvavā devu nahi ne prārabdhnu āve to bhogavī levu.
We have attained God and the Sadhu, now do not let misery enter the heart and accept whatever fate has in store for us.
Vaat 1.177
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 177 · Chapter 1 · Verse 177
Jevā shabda sāmbhaḷe tevo jīv thaī jāy chhe. Māṭe baḷiyā Bhagwānnā bhakta hoy tenā shabda sāmbhaḷīe to jīvmā baḷ āve, paṇ napunsakne sange baḷ pamāy nahi.
The jiva becomes like the words it hears. So, if the jiva hears the words of a powerful devotee of God, then it becomes strong. But it does not become strong by the company of an impotent person.
Vaat 1.178
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 178 · Chapter 1 · Verse 178
Ā to moṭānī najar paḍī gaī chhe tethī viṣhaynī tīkṣhṇa vṛutti ochhī thaī gaī chhe, nīkar to te vinā rahevāy nahi.
The great have cast their glance of grace on us so the intense desire for enjoyment of worldly pleasures has been reduced, otherwise it is not possible to stay without them.
Vaat 1.179
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 179 · Chapter 1 · Verse 179
Avidyānu1 paṇ Bhagwān chālavā de to chāle, nīkar avidyāno sho bhār chhe? E to Bhagwān draṣhṭi kare to fāṭī mare, māṭe e vāt paṇ samajvī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Māyā.
Māyā is able to influence only if God allows, otherwise what is its strength? If God merely casts a glance it would be destroyed. This, too, should be understood.
Vaat 1.180
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 180 · Chapter 1 · Verse 180
‘Jan avaguṇ Prabhu mānat nahi, Dīnbandhu ati mṛudul swabhāu’ em kalyāṇ thāshe, jāo.
‘Jan avaguṇ Prabhu mānat nahi, Dīnbandhu ati mṛudul swabhāu’1 - this is how you will be liberated. Footnotes: 1. 1. God does not look at the flaws of his devotees. He forgives them of their flaws and liberates them.
Vaat 1.181
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 181 · Chapter 1 · Verse 181
Sant chhe tyā niyam chhe, dharma chhe, gnān chhe. Ne sant chhe tyā anant guṇ chhe ane Bhagwān paṇ tyā ja chhe ne tethī jīv pavitra thāy chhe. Te ‘Vachanāmṛut’mā kahyu chhe je, tap, tyāg, yog, vrat, dān e ādik sādhane karīne Bhagwān kahe, tevo hu vash thāto nathī jevo shuddha antahkaraṇvāḷā sādhune sange karīne rāji thāu chhu. Ne ā satsang maḷyo chhe tenā puṇyano pārāvār nathī. Ajāmeḷ mahāpāpī hato paṇ tene Sanakādik maḷyā ne page lāgyo ne kahe je, “Mārāthī to kāī thāy nahi.” Tyāre sādhu to dayāḷu chhe te chhokrānu nām ‘Nārāṇay’ paḍāvīne paṇ mokṣha karyo.
Where there is the great Sadhu, moral codes are observed, dharma is practised and spiritual wisdom is attained. Also, where there is the Sadhu there are infinite virtues, and also God. So, as a result, the jiva is purified. In the Vachanamrut, it is noted that God has said, “I am not as pleased by austerities, renunciation, yoga, observance of vows, donations or other endeavours as I am by the association of a Sadhu of complete inner purity. Having attained this satsang, the merits are limitless. Ajamil was a grave sinner, but he met Sanakadik, bowed to them and said, ‘I will not be able to do anything.’ But sadhus are compassionate, so they named his son Narayan, and in this way he attained moksha.”
Vaat 1.182
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 182 · Chapter 1 · Verse 182
Bhagwānnā dhāmmā sukh chhe, temāthī chhānṭo nākhyu te Prakṛuti-Puruṣhmā āvyu ne tyāthī Pradhān-Puruṣhmā āvyu ne tyāthī Vairāṭmā āvyu ne tyāthī devtāmā āvyu ne tyāthī āhī manuṣhyamā āvyu chhe; te sukhmā jīvmātra sukhiyā chhe, māṭe sukhmātranu mūḷ kāraṇ Bhagwān chhe; tene sukhe sukhiyā thāvu.
The abode of God is full of bliss. From there a drop of bliss was released, reaching humans via Prakruti-Purush, Pradhan-Purush, Vairat and the deities. That bliss makes all jivas happy. Therefore, the source of all bliss is God. Be happy through his bliss.
Vaat 1.183
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 183 · Chapter 1 · Verse 183
Mātāe Mahārājne kahyu je, “Māro strīno deh te mune jhājhu samajāy nahi, tethī thoḍākmā kaho.” Pachhī Mahārāje chosaṭh lakṣhaṇ sādhunā kahyā1 ne kahyu je, “Evā sādhumā jeṇe ātmabuddhi karī tene sarve sampūrṇa thaī rahyu.” Ne Mahārāje kahyu chhe je, “Evānā darshanne to ame paṇ ichchhīe chhīe,” ityādik bahu mahimā kahyo chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit. 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37] (Swāmīnī Vāt: 1/171nī Pādṭīp)
Bhaktimata told Maharaj, “I am a woman and so I do not understand much. Therefore, explain in brief.” Then Maharaj explained to her the 64 qualities of a true Sadhu1 and said, “For one who has profound attachment to such a Sadhu, everything is gained.” And Maharaj said, “Even I wish for his darshan,” and other such talks of his glory. Footnotes: 1. 1. The 64 qualities of a sadhu (as mentioned in the Satsangijivan/Harigita: 1/25-37) are, one who: 1. Is compassionate, 2. Is forgiving, 3. Wishes the betterment of all jivas, 4. Tolerates cold, heat, etc., 5. Does not look at the flaws in others’ virtues, 6. Is tranquil, 7. Does not have an enemy, 8. Is devoid of jealousy and animosity, 9. Is free of ego and envy, 10. Honors others, Expand all qualities 11. Speaks kindly and truthfully, 12. Is free of lust, anger, greed, and arrogance, 13. Is free of I-ness and my-ness, 14. Is firm in one’s personal dharma, 15. Is free of pretentiousness, 16. Maintains physical and mental purity, 17. Punishes his body and indriyas, 18. Possesses an agreeable nature, 19. Speaks only as necessary, 20. Has control over the indriyas and free of laziness, 21. Is free from the duality of happiness and misery, 22. Possesses patience, 23. Is free from over-activity of karma-indriyas and gnan-indriyas, 24. Does not collect material objects, 25. Is an expert in instruction, 26. Possesses ātmā-realization, 27. Benefits everyone, 28. Is free of all types of fear, 29. Is free from any expectations , 30. Is free of addictions, 31. Possesses faith, 32. Is generous, 33. Is austere, 34. Is free of sin, 35. Does not listen to gossip, 36. Constantly engages in scriptural study, 37. Is free from indulging in worldly pleasures, 38. Possesses a theist intellect, 39. Possesses discretion of truth and false, 40. Is free of alcohol and meat consumption, 41. Is firm in observances of vrats, 42. Does not gossip, 43. Is free of deceit, 44. Does not reveal other’s secrets, 45. Has conquered sleep, 46. Has conquered taste, 47. Is content, 48. Has a stable mind, 49. Is inclined toward nonviolence, 50. Has no desires, 51. Has equanimity in happiness and misery, 52. Is ashamed in doing misdeeds, 53. Does not compliment himself, 54. Does not slander others, 55. Observes celibacy perfectly, 56. Has self-control and restraint, 57. Has complete control of his body, 58. Has control of his breath (and thus internal faculties), 59. Has firm refuge of God, 60. Is inclined toward devotion of God, 61. Does all activities for God’s sake, 62. Is inclined to remain in meditation of God’s murti, 63. Listens to God’s divine incidents, 64. Does not let one second pass without devotion to God.
Vaat 1.184
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 184 · Chapter 1 · Verse 184
Jene gnān na hoy tene to em thāy je, ‘Āpaṇe shu pāmashu ne kyā jāshu?’ Ne jene gnān hoy tene to ‘Aho! Aho!’ thayā kare je, ‘Ā prāpti thaī chhe, have kāī karavu rahyu nathī!’
Those who do not have spiritual wisdom wonder, “What will we attain and where will we go?” Those who have spiritual wisdom feel elated that they have this attainment, and now there is nothing more left to do (here on earth).
Vaat 1.185
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 185 · Chapter 1 · Verse 185
So janmano shuddha brāhmaṇ somvallīno1 pīnāro hoy te karatā paṇ Bhagwānno bhakta shvapach2 hoy te paṇ shreṣhṭha chhe. Em Bhagwānnā bhaktano mahimā samajavo em Prahlādnu vākya chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vedkāḷmā prasiddha ek latā, jenā pānno ras yagnamā vaparāto. 2. Shvānam pachati iti shvapachah - arthāt kūtarāne mārī rāndhī khānāro ek chhellī koṭino manuṣhya. Purāṇmā shvapach shabda bahu vār vaparāyo chhe.
A low caste person who is a devotee of God is greater than even a person who has been a Brahmin for a hundred births and drinks the Soma juice. Understand the glory of a devotee of God in this way – that is Prahladji’s statement.
Vaat 1.186
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 186 · Chapter 1 · Verse 186
Bhagwān jyāre pṛuthvī upar āve tyāre rājasī, tāmasī, sāttvik ne adham teno uddhār karī nākhe chhe, kāī meḷ rahe nahi.
When God incarnates on earth, he liberates the egotistic, arrogant, pure and sinful. He makes no distinctions.
Vaat 1.187
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 187 · Chapter 1 · Verse 187
Ā jīv to jem pardeshmāthī bhāuḍā1 jhālī lāve evā chhe, tene kashī gam nahi. Pachhī tene Sādhu gnān daī daīne manuṣhya kare, tyāre manuṣhya thāy chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Habasī.
The jivas are like the immoral people brought from foreign lands - they have no understanding. However, the Sadhu gives them gnān and transforms them into humans. Only then do they become human.
Vaat 1.188
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 188 · Chapter 1 · Verse 188
“Puruṣhottamnī upāsanāe karīne jīv Akṣhar jevo thāy chhe ne Moṭāne maḷe te bahu moṭapne pāme chhe. Te jū viyāy to līkh āve ne hāthaṇī viyāy to baḷad jevaḍu bachchu āve.” Te upar Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu je, “Jevā Bhagwānne jāṇe tevo pote thāy chhe.”
Through the upāsanā of Purushottam, the jiva becomes like Akshar, and if one associates with the great Sadhu, one attains much greatness. When lice reproduce, they produce tiny eggs and when a female elephant gives birth, the infant is the size of a bull. Based on this, a Vachanamrut was read: one becomes what one believes God to be like (i.e. if one knows God to be free from all blemishes, one also finally becomes free of all blemishes).
Vaat 1.189
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 189 · Chapter 1 · Verse 189
Koṭi kalpnā pāsh lāgyā chhe te hamaṇā Bhagwānmā joḍāvā jaīe chhīe paṇ māyāmā joḍāī javāy chhe. Ne jyāre gnān thāshe tyāre māyāmā joḍāvā jāshu to paṇ Bhagwānmā joḍāī javāshe. Ne hamaṇā to indriyu-antahkaraṇnā bhāvthī mukāīne Sādhumā joḍāvu ne Sādhu Bhagwānmā joḍshe, ne potāne baḷe chhūṭavā jāy tem vadhu bandhāshe.
The impressions of tens of millions of years have been made on the soul. At present we try to unite with God, but instead we are drawn towards māyā. But when spiritual knowledge is attained, even if we try to join with māyā, still we’ll be drawn towards God. For now, rise above the feelings of the senses and inner faculties and closely associate with the God-realized Sadhu; and he will unite us with God. But if one tries to overcome māyā by one’s own strength, one becomes increasingly bound to it.
Vaat 1.190
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 190 · Chapter 1 · Verse 190
Dehno bhāv na jaṇāy evā to Swarūpānand Swāmī, kem je, e to dehmā varate nahi ne bījāne to dehnā bhāv jaṇāy chhe.
Swarupanand Swami is one who does not show any qualities of the body because he never behaved as the body. Others will show the qualities of the body.
Vaat 1.191
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 191 · Chapter 1 · Verse 191
Ek shabde karīne to Swarūpānand Swāmīne gnān thāy ne āpaṇne to karoḍ shabda paḍe tyāre gnān thāy paṇ tarat na samajāy.
Swarupanand Swami attains spiritual wisdom in one word, whereas we require ten million words to attain spiritual wisdom, but we cannot understand instantly.
Vaat 1.192
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 192 · Chapter 1 · Verse 192
Pūrve moṭā moṭā thayā temā koīmā koī prakārno doṣh hoy paṇ te doṣh kahevāy nahi, ne temāthī to jīv bagaḍī jāy. Ne evī vātmā to Shivjīnā ācharaṇmāthī Chitraketune sanskār thayā.1 Te chakalīnu mot ḍhepale,2 ne satsangnī moṭap to nishchay vaḍe chhe, paṇ sādhane karīne nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nāradjīnā updeshthī Chitraketu Rājāe karoḍ strīono tyāg karyo ne Yamunā tīre tap karī vidyādharonu ādhipatya prāpta karyu. Chitraketu ek vār ākāshmārge nīkaḷyo. Nīche Kailās par Shivjīnā sāthaḷ par Pārvatīne beṭhelā joī te hasī paḍyo, em ke potāno tyāg ne tap Shivjī karatā keṭalā ūnchā chhe! Pārvatīe krodhāymā thaī shāp dīdho, tethī tene Vṛutrāsur thavu paḍyu. Shivjīno aparādh thavāthī asur thavu paḍyu e sanskār thayā. 2. Jem chakalī jevu nānu pankhī nānī ḍhepalīthī (kākarīthī) mare, tem nānā aparādhe paṇ rājā asur thayo.
Even if the great of the past had drawbacks, they should not be talked about. Since, such talks spoil the jiva. The example of Chitraketu, who criticized Shivji, illustrates the misery one has to suffer for such talks.1 A small bird is killed by a small pebble2 and greatness in Satsang is due to absolute faith in God, but not due to mere endeavours. Footnotes: 1. 1. As advised by Naradji, Chitraketu renounced his ten million wives and performed austerities on the banks of the river Yamuna. He attained the kingship of Vidyadhar. Once, Chitraketu was flying in the sky. Below, on Mt. Kailas, he saw Parvatiji seated on Shivji’s lap and laughed, thinking that his renunciation and austerities were greater than Shivji’s. This infuriated Parvatiji, who cursed Chitraketu to take birth as the demon Vritrasur. Thus, by insulting Shivji, he had to suffer. 2. Similarly, even by a small insult, Chitraketu had to take birth as a demon.
Vaat 1.193
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 193 · Chapter 1 · Verse 193
Āpaṇu kalyāṇ to pratyakṣha Bhagwānne āshare karīne chhe ne shāstra pramāṇe vartavu e to bījānā kalyāṇne arthe chhe, kem je, āpaṇo guṇ āve tenu paṇ kalyāṇ thāy.
Our liberation relies on the refuge of the manifest form of God, while behaving according to the scriptures is for the liberation of others. Why? Because whoever perceives our virtue (because we behave according to the scriptures) will be liberated.
Vaat 1.194
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 194 · Chapter 1 · Verse 194
Keṭlāk dharmamā ākarā hoy paṇ samajaṇ thoḍī hoy ne keṭlāk dharmamā sāmānya hoy to paṇ samajaṇ sārī hoy, māṭe samajaṇ hoy te vṛuddhine pāme.
Some are very staunch in observing dharma but weak in their understanding; whereas some are ordinary in observing dharma but their understanding is superb. Hence, one with understanding progresses.
Vaat 1.195
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 195 · Chapter 1 · Verse 195
Brahmabhāv ne mahimānī vāt jhājhī kahetā nathī, kem je, emāthī to māṇas gānḍā thaī jāy chhe, te sāru vartamān ne puruṣh-prayatnanī vāt karīe chhīe, kem je, anant jīvne Prabhu bhajāvvā chhe māṭe.
I do not speak much about the state of brahman or the glory of God since it makes people go mad. So, I talk about the moral and spiritual codes of conduct and personal endeavour, since we want to make infinite jivas worship God.
Vaat 1.196
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 196 · Chapter 1 · Verse 196
Āpaṇe jāṇīe chhīe je, āpaṇne Bhagwānmā het chhe paṇ āpaṇā karatā to āpaṇā upar Bhagwānne ne Sādhune jhājhu het chhe.
We believe that we have love for God, but God and his holy Sadhu have even more love for us.
Vaat 1.197
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 197 · Chapter 1 · Verse 197
Jīvmātra laghushankānā1 chhe te enu bhajan kare chhe, e vinā to rahevāy nahi; te kyā sudhī je, Vairāṭ sudhī na rahevāy, ne emāthī to ek Sanakādik taryā, ne ā to Mahārāje navo uṭhāv karyo chhe. Ne āpaṇe to ko’k lokmāthī āvyā hoīshu te ahī besāy chhe ne āvo jog maḷyo chhe; nīkar maḷe nahi. Ne viṣhay vinā to jīvthī rahevāy nahi; te sāru Vede karīne ne niyam bāndhīne viṣhaynī rajā āpī. To paṇ jīv Ved pramāṇe chālatā nathī ne sārā sārā māṇas paṇ nathī chālatā, kem je, viṣhaynu bahu baḷ chhe. E prakāre vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Laghushankā - māyāmāthī jīvo ūpajyā chhe tethī tenu bhajan kare chhe.
All jivas are insignificant and worship the material pleasures, otherwise they are unable to survive. What level of creation does this go up to? Up to Vairat they cannot survive without material pleasures. Of them, only the Sanakadiks overcame. But Maharaj has started a new venture. We must have come from some holy realm and so are able to sit here and have attained this company of a great Sadhu; otherwise it is not attainable. Since jivas cannot live without material pleasures, freedom to enjoy the material pleasures has been granted, based on the Vedas and moral codes of conduct. Still, the jiva does not behave as per the Vedas. Even good people do not follow them since the material pleasures are very powerful.
Vaat 1.198
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 198 · Chapter 1 · Verse 198
Ā kārkhānāmā to brahmānḍ jeṭalo vahevār karavo ne na bandhāvu, evā to ek Sahajānand Swāmī chhe. Ne ā kām to kevu chhe je, āṭh dokḍābhārnī undarḍīne māthe hajār maṇno pāṭaḍo ūbho paḍe to undarḍī kyāī dekhāy nahi evu chhe. Te Mahārāje kahyu chhe je, “Gopāḷānand Swāmī ne Muktānand Swāmī te paṇ ūtaratā jevā rahe ke na rahe!” Māṭe āpaṇe to Bhagwān ne Sādhu e be ja rākhavā ane sonu rākhīne upar rūpiyā devā temā khoṭ na āve ne bījā vepārmā to khoṭ paṇ āve. Māṭe ātmaniṣhṭhā ādik guṇ chhe; paṇ Bhagwān ne Sādhu jevu koī nathī.
To conduct the activities of the whole universe in this workshop, and yet remain unattached is a feat only Sahajanand Swami can perform. What is this work like? It is like a 1000 kilo weight falling vertically on a lightweight mouse which then ceases to be seen. Thus, Maharaj said, “Well, whether or not even Gopalanand Swami and Muktanand Swami would remain like even a lowly person (by their involvement in worldly activities) is not guaranteed.” Therefore, we should only keep the company of God and his Sadhu. Since, no one is like them.
Vaat 1.199
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 199 · Chapter 1 · Verse 199
Ek ek viṣhay chhe te Girnār jevā chhe, te ākhī pṛuthvīnā suthār, luhār, kaḍiyā bheḷā karīne ponchse hajār varas sudhī khode tyāre khodāy, em e vārtā karī te samajavī.
Each sense pleasure is like the Girnar mountain. If all the world’s carpenters, blacksmiths and masons get together and dig for 500-1000 years then Girnar can be dug. This talk should be understood in this way.
Vaat 1.200
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 200 · Chapter 1 · Verse 200
Sarva karatā bhajan karavu te adhik chhe ne te karatā smṛuti rākhavī te adhik chhe ne te karatā dhyān karavu te adhik chhe ne te karatā potānā ātmāne viṣhe Bhagwānne dhāravā te adhik chhe.
Above all, to offer worship is better; and compared to that to keep on remembering (God and his holy Sadhu) is better; and compared to that to do meditation is better; and compared to that to behold God within one’s ātmā is better.
Vaat 1.201
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 201 · Chapter 1 · Verse 201
Sarva-kartā to Bhagwān chhe. Hamaṇā āpaṇe ūnghmā jāvu hoy to javāy nahi ne ūnghmā gayā hoīe ne pachhī chor āvīne lūnṭī jāy paṇ āpaṇāthī jagāy nahi. Māṭe sarva-kartā to Bhagwān chhe.
God is the all-doer. If we want to sleep now we cannot, and once asleep even if a thief comes and robs us, we are unable to wake up. Thus, God is the all-doer.
Vaat 1.202
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 202 · Chapter 1 · Verse 202
Viṣhayrūp fānsalo jīvnā gaḷāmā nākhyo chhe, tenu bahu baḷ chhe. Te nadīno pravāh chālato hoy tyā sudhī enu baḷ na jaṇāy, tene bandh kare tyāre khabar paḍe; tem moṭā moṭā Saubhari ne Parāshar ādik dishunā1 jītnārā bhāre bhāre, tene paṇ parābhav pamāḍyā chhe. Te vāsanā je lingdeh te to ātyantik pralaymā paṇ na baḷyu, te āj gnāne karīne baḷe chhe. Mahārāje to sarve bārā bandh karī dīdhā chhe, te jīv shu kare? Jem dhoriyāmā sālī tāṇe2 chhe teṇe bārā bandh thaī jāy ne pāṇī kyāī jāvā pāme nahi, em bandh karyu chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dishāonā. 2. Ghāsnā pūḷā par chhokaro besāḍī dhoriyāmā khenche tethī kāṇā purāy ne sāf thāy.
A powerful noose in the form of material pleasures hangs around the jiva’s neck. The force of a river is not noticed as long as it is in flow, but if a dam is built then it becomes known. The great, like Saubhari, Parashar and others, conquerors of all directions, have also been defeated by material pleasures. That desire, which is the causal body, was not burnt even at the time of final dissolution, but today it is burnt through spiritual knowledge. Maharaj has closed all loopholes, so what can the jiva do? Just as, to stop a stream of water, bales of grass are placed so that the gaps are filled and no water can pass, similarly, Shriji Maharaj has closed the loopholes for material pleasures.
Vaat 1.203
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 203 · Chapter 1 · Verse 203
Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Termu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne temā, desh-kāḷnu bahu prakāre viṣhampaṇu thaī jāy ne temā paṇ ekāntikpaṇu kem rahe? E prashna upar vāt karī je, “Nishchay rahe e ja ekāntikpaṇu chhe ane e ja rahevānu. Te jem chintāmaṇi rahī ne bīju dhan sarve gayu paṇ kāī gayu nathī ne chintāmaṇi gaī ne bīju dhan sarve rahyu to paṇ kāī rahyu nahi; tem ja ek nishchay rahyo to sarve rahyu ne ante e ja rahevānu chhe.”
Vachanamrut Gadhada III-13 was read and then Swami talked on the question, “How can one remain God-centred even when circumstances become very bad?” Swami said, “If complete faith remains, that is itself a characteristic of one who is God-centred. Just as, if the chintāmani remains and all other wealth is lost, then nothing is lost; but if the chintāmani is lost and all wealth remains, then nothing remains; similarly, if firm faith remains then everything remains and in the end only that will remain and is the means of final moksha.
Vaat 1.204
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 204 · Chapter 1 · Verse 204
Chhellā Prakaraṇnā Pātrīsnā Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe je, “Chha lakṣhaṇe yukta sant hoy tenī sevā karye Bhagwānnī sevānu faḷ thāy chhe ne teno droh karye Bhagwānnā drohnu pāp lāge chhe,” māṭe āj to bahudhā ākho satsang evo chhe.
In Vachanamrut Gadhada III-35, it is stated, “By serving the sadhu who has the six virtues,1 one gains the merits of serving God; and by insulting him, one incurs the sin of insulting God.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The six virtues are: (1) he never believe God to be formless, (2) he engage in the ekāntik bhakti of God and is pleased when someone else does the same, (3) when he stays among devotees, he does not allow any of his swabhāvs to interfere, (4) when he comes across any precious item, he is happier giving it away, (5) he is of frank nature, such that everyone would know him outwardly and inwardly, and (6) though of a quiet nature, he does not like the company of kusangis.
Vaat 1.205
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 205 · Chapter 1 · Verse 205
Kharekharā bhagvadī hoy tene guṇ na vyāpe; e to darvāje1 rahīne joyā kare chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jāṇpaṇārūp.
One who is truly spiritual is not affected by the influence of the three material qualities of ignorance, passion and goodness, but stands at the doorway of awareness and remains alert.
Vaat 1.206
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 206 · Chapter 1 · Verse 206
Mahārāj kahe, “Amane em sankalp thāy chhe je, sarvene Muktānand Swāmī jevā karī mūkīe pachhī sāchavvā na paḍe. Te Muktānand Swāmīne to gnān. Te gnāne karīne sarva ṭāḷī nākhe ne Muktānand Swāmīne to shabda ākāshno bhāg chhe em kāptā āvaḍe. Ne bījāne to evu gnān nahi te sāru ā niyam karyā chhe je, jovu nahi, sāmbhaḷvu nahi. E prakāre niyam bāndhyā chhe.”
Maharaj says, “I wish to make everyone like Muktanand Swami, then they do not have to be looked after. Muktanand Swami has spiritual wisdom, with which he overcomes everything. And for Muktanand Swami, words are a part of space, so he knows how to interpret them. Others do not have this spiritual wisdom, so these codes of conduct have been formulated for them: do not see, do not listen, etc.; such codes of conduct have been made.”
Vaat 1.207
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 207 · Chapter 1 · Verse 207
Brahmavettāne mate to Vedno mārga je vidhi-niṣhedh te paṇ gaṇatīmā nathī, em Jaḍbharate Rahūgaṇne kahyu. Enī samajaṇmā to ātmā ne Paramātmā e be ja vāt rākhavī, em kahyu. Ne te upar Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Chhellu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu ne bolyā je, “Ā Vachanāmṛutmā paṇ ātmā ne Paramātmā e be vātno veg lagāḍī devo, em Mahārājno siddhānt chhe.”
“Jadbharat said to King Rahugan that the path the Vedas have shown – that of the moral do’s and don’ts - does not come into consideration for one who is a brahmavettā (i.e. one who knows Brahman). According to his understanding, one should only realize both ātmā and Paramātmā.” Based on this, Swāmi had Vachanāmrut Gadhadā III-39 read and said, “The principle that Mahārāj establishes in this Vachanāmrut is also the same; that one should only truly have fervor for ātmā and Paramātmā.”
Vaat 1.208
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 208 · Chapter 1 · Verse 208
Māro deh pachīs varas thayā, āvardā vinā rahyo chhe. Te shā sāru je, mumukṣhunā rūḍāne arthe rahyo chhe, ne Mahārājnu swarūp samajāvvu paḍe te sāru amane rākhyā chhe.
My body has remained for 25 years more than its original lifespan. Why? For the benefit of spiritual aspirants, I have been kept to explain Maharaj’s form.
Vaat 1.209
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 209 · Chapter 1 · Verse 209
Hālno āvelo hashe tene Akṣhardhāmnu sukh āvatu hashe. Ne swarūpniṣhṭhā vinā to Mahārājno maḷelo hashe, ne Muktānand Swāmīno maḷelo hashe tene Akṣharnu sukh nahi āvatu hoy; em samajaṇmā rahyu chhe.
One who has recently joined the Satsang may be enjoying the bliss of Akshardham. And without resolute faith in the manifest form of God, one may have met Maharaj, or met Muktanand Swami but will not have the bliss of Akshar. This is the very nature of understanding.
Vaat 1.210
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 210 · Chapter 1 · Verse 210
Āpaṇne gnān to āvaḍe nahi ne vairāgya to chhe ja nahi, māṭe ‘Hu Bhagwānno ne e mārā’ em mānavu. Ne het to pandar ānā1 sansārmā chhe ne ek āno amārāmā chhe ne kalyāṇ to ene sharaṇe gayā eṭale e samartha chhe te karashe, e enī moṭāī chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Hālnī rūpiyā paddhati pahelā 16 ānāno rūpiyo gaṇāto te gaṇatrī pramāṇe samajavu. 6 paisāno ek āno gaṇāto.
We do not have the spiritual knowledge and do not possess detachment. So, believe ‘I am God’s and God is mine.’ And you have maximum attachment for worldly pleasures and minimum attachment for us. But since you have surrendered at his feet and he is capable, he will ensure your moksha. That is his greatness.
Vaat 1.211
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 211 · Chapter 1 · Verse 211
Jem chhe em kahīe to gher koī jaī shake nahi ne gher jāy to tyā rahevāy nahi. Em kahīne bolyā je, Tājī tīkṣhaṇ dhār, aḍatāmā aḷagu kare; Lesh na rahe sansār, vajra lāgyā koī vīrnā.
“If we tell you things as they are nobody would return home; and if they did return home, they would not be able to stay there.” With this, Swami said, “Tāji tikshan dhār adtāmā algu kare; Lesh na rahe sansār, vajra lāgyā koi virnā.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. A freshly sharpened edge cuts an object the instant it touches; No trace of worldly desires remain if the sharp words of a truly powerful Sadhu (which are like a sharpened sword) are heard.
Vaat 1.212
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 212 · Chapter 1 · Verse 212
Rājāne pāṇī na pāyu1 to paṇ sankalp karyo hato tethī gām āpyu. Te jīv potānā swabhāv mūktā nathī, tem Bhagwān paṇ potāno swabhāv mokṣha karavāno, te mūktā nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Shikāre nīkaḷelo ek rājā tarasyo thayo. Pāṇīnī shodh karatā dūrthī teṇe ek kheḍūtne khetarmā haḷ chalāvato joyo. Rājāe sankalp karyo, “Jo kheḍūt pāse pāṇī maḷe to tene gām bheṭ āpavu.” Rājā kheḍūt pāse pahonchyo. Kheḍūt pāse pāṇī to hatu parantu teṇe pāṇī nahī āpavā nirdhār karelo, tethī badhu pāṇī ḍhoḷī nākhyu. Tem chhatā, rājāe sankalp karelo eṭale sajjantā dākhavīne tene gām bheṭ āpyu.
[A farmer] did not give the king water to drink. However, [the king] had already pledged to give the farmer a village, so he gave the farmer a village.1 Just as the jiva does not forsake its swabhāvs, God also does not forsake his swabhāv of liberating jivas. Footnotes: 1. 1. There is a folk tale regarding these words, as told by Yogiji Maharaj: One king became thirsty during his hunting trip. In search for water, he saw a farmer from far away plowing his field. The king pledged that if the farmer gives him water, he would give the farmer a village - make him the chief of the village. When the king reached the farmer, the farmer decidedly spilled the water rather than give it to the king. The king turned back. The next day, the king called the farmer to his court and told everyone how the farmer did not give him water. Then, he said, “I am a great king. Even though he did not give me water, I still want to fulfill my pledge.” Thus, he gave the farmer one village. The message: Maharaj takes us to Akshardham because of his immense grace.
Vaat 1.213
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 213 · Chapter 1 · Verse 213
Mānī hoy tene mān āpīne jītavo, garavī1 hoy tenī āgaḷ dīn thaīne jītavo, lobhī hoy tene padārth āpīne jītavo ne garībne dabāvīne jītavo; em keṭalīk gnānkaḷā shīkhavī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ghamanḍī, garvavāḷo, lokmā moṭo gaṇāto.
A egotist can be won by praising him. An arrogant person can be won by becoming humble to him. A greedy person can be won by giving him objects. And the meek can be won by subduing them. One should learn these types of wise skills.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The ultimate aim in learning how to win people is to ensure their liberation. Many people in satsang may still possess certain natures which can be the cause of leaving satsang. However, when one recognizes these natures and behaves accordingly, one may prevent them from leaving satsang while securing their liberation.
Vaat 1.214
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 214 · Chapter 1 · Verse 214
Divyabhāv ne manuṣhyabhāv e bene ek samaje te māyāne tarī rahyo chhe, ne e ja māyā chhe te jāṇavī, ne em na jāṇe to pratham pratāp dekhāḍe tyāre ānand thāy, ne rue tyāre mūnjhvaṇ thāy. Ne divyabhāv-manuṣhyabhāv ek samaje tene kayu sādhan karavānu bākī chhe? Kāī paṇ nathī.
One who understands divine traits and the display of human traits (in God and the God-realized Sadhu) to be equal has overcome māyā. Seeing human traits should be known as māyā. If this is not known, then, when at first extraordinary powers are displayed (by God or his holy Sadhu), there is joy. But when they show human traits (e.g. crying, etc.), there is dismay. And for one who believes divine traits and the display of human traits to be one, what spiritual endeavours remain for him to do? None.
Vaat 1.215
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 215 · Chapter 1 · Verse 215
Vaṇthaḷīmā vāt karī je, “Ā Vaṇthaḷī gām koīkne āpe to te gānḍo thaī jāy, ne vaḷī Vaḍodaru āpe to vāt ja shī kahevī? Ne āpaṇne to karoḍ karoḍ Vaḍodarā maḷyā chhe, te em paṇ kahevāy nahi, ne have to deh rahe tyā sudhī bājaro khāvo ane Prabhu bhajavā. Ne roṭalā to Bhagwānne devā chhe, ne Sādhune devā chhe, te āpashe; ne deh paḍashe ke Bhagwān pāse jaīne besavu chhe. Te jem angarkhu utārī mūke tem deh paḍyu raheshe,” em vāt karī.
In Vanthali Swami said, “If this Vanthali village is given as a gift to someone he would go mad. So what would be his condition if he is given Vadodara? We have attained tens of millions of Vadodaras1 – even that is an understatement. So now, as long as we live, eat simple food and worship God. And both God and the Sadhu wants to give us food, so they will give. When we die, we want to sit next to God. Our ātmā will go up while our body, like a discarded shirt, will lie here.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Meaning, what we have attained is worth more than possessing millions of Vadodara cities.
Vaat 1.216
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 216 · Chapter 1 · Verse 216
Jem gṛuhasth potānī mā, ben, dīkarīne ughāḍā dekhe to avaḷu joī jāy paṇ sāmu na jue; tem Bhagwān paṇ potānā āshritnā doṣh sāmu jotā nathī.
Just as a householder turns his face on seeing his mother, sister or daughter undressed, similarly, God does not look at the faults of his devotees.
Vaat 1.217
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 217 · Chapter 1 · Verse 217
Ā pṛuthvīnā sarva jīv-prāṇīmātra rājā, prajā ādik chhe paṇ jo Indra varasād na varasāve to sarva marī jāy. Ne te Indra chhe te Brahmā, Viṣhṇu ne Shiv āgaḷ gaṇatīmā nathī, ne e sarve Vairāṭnī āgaḷ gaṇatīmā nathī. Ne te Vairāṭ Pradhān-Puruṣhnī āgaḷ gaṇatīmā nathī. Ne e sarve Akṣharnī āgaḷ gaṇatīmā nathī, ane te Akṣharthī par evā je Puruṣhottam te āj āpaṇne sākṣhāt maḷyā chhe. Māṭe tenu baḷ rākhavu.
On this earth the jivas are kings, citizens, etc. but if Indra does not send the rains, they will all die. And that Indra is insignificant before Brahmā, Vishnu and Shiv. And they are insignificant before Vairat. That Vairat is insignificant before Pradhan-Purush. And all these pale into insignificance before Akshar. And above that Akshar is Purushottam, whom we have attained in person today. Therefore, be strong due to one’s close association with him.
Vaat 1.218
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 218 · Chapter 1 · Verse 218
Moṭā Sādhunā samāgamthī viṣhaynī vāsanā ṭaḷī gaī chhe to paṇ na ṭaḷyā jevu jaṇāy chhe tenu kāraṇ e chhe je, jem taravārmā mariyā1 lāgyā hoy te sarāṇe2 chaḍāvyāthī maṭī jāy, paṇ bahu kāṭ lāgīne māhī ūtarī gayā hoy to te maṭe nahi ne te to taravār gāḷīne farīthī ghaḍe tyāre maṭe. Tem ā deh mūkīne brahmarūp thāshe eṭale sarve vāsanā ṭaḷī jāshe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tarvār lokhanḍnī hoī vadhu samay vaparāyā vagar jo te paḍī rahe to zīṇā zīṇā kāṭnā ḍāgh tene lāgī jāy. Ā ḍāghne mariyā kahe chhe. 2. Dhār kāḍhavānu yantra.
By our close association with a great Sadhu our desires for worldly pleasures have been overcome, yet we feel that they have not been. Giving the reason for this Swami said, “Spots of rust on a sword are removed by sharpening it using a whetstone, but if the rust has gone too deep, then it cannot be removed; only if the sword is melted and remoulded can it be removed. Similarly, all desires will be removed only when, even after one leaves this body, one becomes brahmarup.”
Vaat 1.219
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 219 · Chapter 1 · Verse 219
Ā Sādhu to Bhagwānnā hajūrnā rahenārā chhe ne paḷmātra chheṭe rahe evā nathī; ne chheṭe rahe chhe te koī jīvnā kalyāṇne arthe chhe. Ane ā same ek vāt thāy chhe tevī vāt bījā janmāntarmā paṇ karī shake nahi ne te karatā paṇ āvaḍe nahi ne janmāro abhyās kare to paṇ evī vāt shikhāy nahi.
This Sadhu always stays in the service of God and is not away from him even for a moment. He stays apart from God only for the moksha of jivas. The talks taking place in Satsang at this time are not possible even in another birth; and one would not know how to deliver them. And even if one studies for one’s entire life, one cannot learn them.
Vaat 1.220
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 220 · Chapter 1 · Verse 220
Bhagwānnu ne ā Sādhunu gnān jene thayu chhe tene kāī karavu rahyu nathī. Te to āhī chhe to paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā ja beṭho chhe. Māṭe pānch māḷā vadhu-ochhī farashe tenī chintā nathī, te to sāmarthya pramāṇe vartavu; paṇ Bhagwān ne ā Sādhu e bene jīvmā rākhavā ne āpaṇe sādhanne baḷe moṭāī nathī, āpaṇe to upāsanānā baḷthī moṭāī chhe.
One who has gained the knowledge of God and this Sadhu has nothing left to do. Even though he is here, he is sitting in Akshardham. Therefore, one should not worry whether they turned five more or five less mālās. One should behave according to their ability. But one should keep God and this Sadhu in their jiva. Our greatness is not based on the spiritual endeavors; our greatness is based on the understanding of upāsanā.
Vaat 1.221
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 221 · Chapter 1 · Verse 221
Āj Bhagwān Akṣhardhām sahit ahī padhāryā chhe, tenā swarūpno parbhāv samajāto nathī e ja moṭu pāp chhe. Māṭe Jādav jevā na thāvu1 paṇ Uddhavjī jevā bhakta thāvu.2 Ne Moṭā Sādhu hoy tene bījā jevā kahevā tathā bījāthī ūtartā jevā kahevā, ethī eno droh thāy chhe. Ne āj to jevī vātu thāy chhe ne samajāy chhe tevī koī divas samajāṇī nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwān Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanā kuḷmā janma lenār manuṣhyo - Yādavo. Teo Bhagwān sāthe rahevā chhatā temane oḷakhī shakyā nahī. 2. Uddhavjī Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanā sakhā hatā. Mahimāvāḷā bhakta. Dāsnā dās rahevāmā moṭap samajnārā. Sambandhavāḷāno mahimā samajnāra.
Today, God has come to this earth with his Akshardham (Aksharbrahman incarnate). That the power of his human form cannot be understood is a grave sin. Thus, do not be like the Yadavs who did not understand the glory of Shri Krishna, but become a devotee like Uddhavji. To call the great Sadhu as being like others or inferior to others amounts to insulting him. And never before have there been such discourses and understanding as there is today.
Vaat 1.222
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 222 · Chapter 1 · Verse 222
Āvā ne āvā Akṣhardhāmmāthī āvyā chhe, evo parbhāv akhanḍ jaṇāy to “Aho! Aho!” sarakhu rahe; paṇ jevā Sādhu chhe evā oḷakhātā nathī.
The Sadhu has come here from Akshardham. If such glory is understood continuously, one experiences great joy. But this Sadhu is not understood as he is.
Vaat 1.223
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 223 · Chapter 1 · Verse 223
Jīvno ne dehno vahevār nokho samajvo, ne em na samaje to ā prāpti bhāre thaī chhe to paṇ durbaḷtā manāy; ne Bhagwānnī āgnāthī gṛuhasthāshram kare to paṇ nirbandh chhe.
Understand the workings of the jiva and body to be separate. If this is not understood, then despite this great attainment, one feels weak. But if understood, and by God’s wish one marries, then still one remains unattached.
Vaat 1.224
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 224 · Chapter 1 · Verse 224
Kṛupānand Swāmī ādik moṭā moṭā sādhunā jeṭalu āpaṇāmā baḷ nahi, māṭe moṭānī barobar sādhan karavāno vād mūkīne agiyār niyam1 pāḷavā eṭale temanā jevu baḷiyu thavāshe. Shāthī je, ā satsangmā upāsanā, dharma ādik sarva chhe, kāī bākī nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Premānand Swāmīe Shikṣhāpatrīmāthī ‘Nirvikalp uttam ati’ prārthanāmā varṇavelā agiyār niyam: (1) koīnī Hinsā na karavī, (2) parastrīno sang na karavo, (3) māns na khāvu, (4) dārū na pīvo, (5) vidhavā strīno sparsha na karavo, (6) ātmahatyā na karavī, (7) chorī na karavī, (8) koīne kalank lagāḍī fajet-kalankit na karavo, (9) koī devanī nindā na karavī, (10) bin-khaptu - hoṭal vagerenu ane ḍungaḷī-lasaṇ-hingavāḷu na khāvu, ane (11) Bhagwvān ane santathī vimukh jīv hoy tenā mukhethī kathā na sāmbhaḷavī.
We do not have spiritual strength like Krupanand Swami and other great sadhus. So, give up trying to copy the endeavours of the great and observe the eleven codes of conduct.1 By this one can become strong like them. Why? Because in this satsang there is upāsanā, dharma, and everything else. Nothing is left out. Footnotes: 1. 1. The eleven codes of conduct from the Shikshapatri and mentioned by Premanand Swami in the prarthana ‘Nirvikalp Uttam Ati’: (1) Never harm any living being, (2) do not associate with women not closely related to you, (3) do not eat meat, (4) do not drink intoxicating beverages, (5) do not associate with widows, (6) do not commit suicide, (7) do not steal, (8) do not falsely blame anyone, (9) do not insult any deities, (10) do not eat food prepared by inappropriate people, and (11) do not listen to discourses by atheists.
Vaat 1.225
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 225 · Chapter 1 · Verse 225
Bhagwānnī mūrti, Bhagwānnu dhām, Bhagwānnā pārṣhad ne jīv e chār avināshī chhe, bākī badhu nāshvant chhe. Temā jīv chhe te baddha chhe. Jem koīkne beḍīmā nākhe chhe te nīkaḷāy nahi, tem Puruṣhne Prakṛutirūp strī ane strīne puruṣh em beḍī1 chhe; te paraspar beḍī chhe te koī rīte truṭe tevī nathī. Te to gnānthī truṭe chhe, nīkar dehe karīne tyāg kare paṇ truṭatī nathī. Te upar pāvaiyānu2 tathā baḷadnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, ene dehe karīne tyāg chhe paṇ vāsanā ṭaḷe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bāndhvānī sānkaḷ. 2. Napunsaknu.
The murti of God, the abode of God, the pārshad of God and the jiva – these four are eternal and everything else is perishable. Of them, the jiva is bound. Just as someone who is shackled cannot get out, similarly, the jiva is shackled to Prakruti in the form of women, and women are shackled to men. Thus they are mutually bound, and this cannot be broken by any means. However, this is broken by spiritual knowledge, but it is not broken by merely physically renouncing. On this, the example of a eunuch and bullock was given, “They renounce physically but desires are not overcome.”
Vaat 1.226
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 226 · Chapter 1 · Verse 226
Koṭi sādhan kare paṇ ām vātu karavī ane sāmbhaḷvī tenī barobar thāy nahi ne bījāthī to āṭalī pravṛuttimā vātu thāy nahi.
Tens of millions of spiritual endeavours may be performed, but they are not equal to delivering and listening to these spiritual talks. And others are not able to deliver such talks amid such activity.
Vaat 1.227
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 227 · Chapter 1 · Verse 227
Ā jīvne māyāthī nirleppaṇu be prakārthī chhe, ek gnāne karīne tathā bīju Bhagwānnī āgnāthī, bākī to niyame karīne chhe. Paṇ desh-kāḷe teno bhang thāy to glāni pāmī jāy .
This jiva remains untouched by māyā in two ways – one is by spiritual wisdom and the second is by following the commands of God. Another way is through observing moral codes of conduct. If due to circumstances, they are transgressed, then one becomes dejected.
Vaat 1.228
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 228 · Chapter 1 · Verse 228
Gnāne karīne sthiti karavī te dekhvā karatā paṇ adhik chhe, ne Parvatbhāī, Kṛupānand Swāmī, Muktānand Swāmī emane samādhi nahotī, paṇ mūrtine dekhtā kharā; ne Parvatbhāī hamaṇā āpaṇe samajīe chhīe tem samajtā. Māṭe brahmarūp mānīne Bhagwān māhī rahyā chhe em mānavu, e gnānnī sthiti chhe, te adhik chhe, ne temā vighna nathī. Ne te vinā to Sachchidānand Swāmī samādhīvāḷāne paṇ dukh āvatā. Māṭe premī na thāvu ne gnānī thāvu ne potānī samajaṇne chhupāvī rākhavī, Kṛupānand Swāmīnī peṭhe.
Developing an elevated spiritual state through knowledge is greater than seeing God during meditation. Parvatbhai, Krupanand Swami and Muktanand Swami did not experience samadhi, but they could continuously see the murti of God. And Parvatbhai understood as we understand now.1 Therefore, to believe oneself as brahmarup and that God resides within, is the state of spiritual wisdom; that is superior to samadhi and it is free of obstacles. Footnotes: 1. 1. That Shriji Maharaj is supreme God and Gunatitanand Swami is the incarnation of Aksharbrahman.
Vaat 1.229
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 229 · Chapter 1 · Verse 229
Paḍchhāyāne pahochāy nahi, tem ja viṣhayne tathā sādhanne paṇ pahochāy nahi ne teno pār āve tem nathī, māṭe gnān thāy tyāre sukh thāy chhe.
A shadow cannot be caught, similarly, material desires and endeavours also cannot be fulfilled. And it is not likely that one will reach their limit, therefore, happiness is experienced when spiritual wisdom is attained.
Vaat 1.230
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 230 · Chapter 1 · Verse 230
Āpaṇe Bhagwānnā chhīe paṇ māyānā nathī em mānavu.
Believe that we belong to God and not to māyā.
Vaat 1.231
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 231 · Chapter 1 · Verse 231
Ā vātu to anant sanshayne chhedī nākhe evī Puruṣhottam Bhagwānnī chhe. Dehne potānu rūp māne to temā badhāy dukh rahyā chhe ne dehne na māne to temā dukh ja nahi. Ne shāstramā bahu prakārnā shabda chhe, te sāmbhaḷīne bhramī javāy chhe ne māthu farī jāy chhe ne brahmarūp maṭīne dehrūp manāī jāy chhe. Ane shāstramā to badhāy shabda sarakhā hoy nahi, be ām hoy ne be ām hoy, paṇ ekdhārā hoy nahī; ne gnān thayu te kenu nām je, shāstra sāmbhaḷīne tathā koīnī vāte karīne ang farī jāy nahi, te pāku gnān kahevāy.
These talks of Purushottam Bhagwan (Supreme God) clear infinite doubts. Believing the body to be one’s true form harbours all miseries. And not believing the body to be one’s true form has no miseries at all. The scriptures contain many words which cause confusion. And when can we say that real spiritual knowledge has been attained? When, even after listening to the scriptures or hearing somebody’s talks, one’s understanding of that which is correct does not change – that is called firm spiritual knowledge.
Vaat 1.232
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 232 · Chapter 1 · Verse 232
Bhagwānne nirdoṣh samajyāthī mokṣha thaī rahyo chhe. Ne doṣh ṭāḷvāno abhyās kare to ṭaḷī jāy, nīkar deh rahe tyā sudhī dukh rahe, ne doṣh jaṇāy chhe te sarve tattvanā doṣh chhe.
By understanding God to be free from all blemishes, moksha is attained. And by studious effort, faults can be overcome, otherwise as long as one lives, misery will remain. And the faults that exist are all due to the elements.
Vaat 1.233
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 233 · Chapter 1 · Verse 233
Vahevār chhe te dehe karīne karavo ne mane karīne judā paḍavu ne manmā bhaḷavā āve to gnāne karīne tyāg karavo.
Perform worldly duties physically, but remain mentally aloof. And if they try to merge with the mind, use spiritual wisdom to renounce them.
Vaat 1.234
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 234 · Chapter 1 · Verse 234
Kā to aṣhṭāng yog1 ne kā to rog; te vinā antarno mel jāy nahi. Te upar ek bhaktanu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, rog āvī gayo te pachhī sāru thayu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Yog eṭale Bhagwān sāthe joḍāvu. Temān āṭh ang - pagathiyā e aṣhṭāng. 1. Yam: ahinsā, satya, asteya, brahmacharya ane aparigrah. 2. Niyam: shauch, santoṣh, tap, svādhyāy ane īshvarpraṇidhān. 3. Āsan: 84 āsan paikī pāncha mukhya: padmāsan, swastikāsan, bhadrāsan, vajrāsan ane vīrāsan. 4. Prāṇāyām: andarnā vāyune nāk vaḍe bahār kāḍhavo ne bahārnā vāyune andar khenchavo - e banne gatine prayatnapūrvak dhīre dhīre ochhī karavī tenu nām prāṇāyām. Chittane rūndhavā māṭe ā ang mahattvanu chhe. 5. Pratyāhār: viṣhaymāthī indriyone pāchhī haṭhāvī antahkaraṇmā sthir karavī. 6. Dhāraṇā: lakṣhyano nishchay karī ekāgratāpūrvak Parmātmānā swarūpmā chittanī vṛuttine rokavī te. 7. Dhyān: vināprayatne Parmātmāmā vṛuttionī ekākārtā. 8. Samādhi: dhyeyrūp Parmātmā sivāy kaī na rahevā pāme, dhyātā puruṣh traṇ deh, traṇ avasthā ne traṇ guṇ, panchabhūt, panchaviṣhay, indriyo-antahkaraṇ ādinu bhān bhūlī Parmātmānā param-sukhno anubhav kare.
The internal dirt can only be cleansed by either ashtāng yog or by disease; but not by anything else. Swami gave an example of a devotee regarding this. He contracted a disease, then he got better.
Vaat 1.235
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 235 · Chapter 1 · Verse 235
Ek haribhakte prashna pūchhyo je, “Shūḷīe chaḍāvyo hoy to paṇ kem samaje to sankalp na thāy je, Bhagwān mukāve to ṭhīk, evī shī samajaṇ chhe?” Teno uttar karyo je, “E to Bhagwānne sarva-kartā jāṇe je, Bhagwān vinā bījā koīnu karyu thātu nathī, em samaje tene sankalp na thāy ne dhīraj rahe. Ne em na samaje te to thoḍākmā akaḷāī jāy ne dhīraj rahe nahi. Ā lokmā to Mahārājne paṇ vagar vānke dukh āvatā. Te ā lok ja evo chhe, tenu rūp jāṇī rākhavu.”
A devotee asked, “If one is about to be executed, what understanding stops one from entertaining a wish that it would be good if God comes to the rescue?” The reply, “He believes God as the all-doer and that except God nobody is able to do anything. Then, no wish will arise and forbearance will remain. And if one does not have this understanding even small things will cause one to become upset and impatient. On this earth, even Maharaj suffered misery without any reason. This world is like that. Its nature (that it brings misery) should be known.”
Vaat 1.236
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 236 · Chapter 1 · Verse 236
Āṭalī vāt to so janme paṇ na samajāy, māṭe ā vāt sau rākhajo. Ne be sārā sādhu ne traṇ sārā haribhaktanī sāthe jīv bāndhavo, to satsangmāthī na paḍāy. Ne kadāpi kām, lobh thoḍā ghaṇā rahī gayā hashe to fikar nathī. Te Mahārāje Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe je, “Kadāpi kām, lobhno sankalp nahi hoy paṇ Bhagwānnā bhaktamā jīv na bandhāṇo to shu thayu? Evāne abhāve asur thāshe.” Māṭe samajavānī vāt to sārā Bhagwānnā bhaktamā jīv bāndhavo eṭalu ja karavānu chhe. Ne jhājhī vātnu ḍoḷ karīe tenu to e prayojan chhe je, ā prathā chalāvavī chhe, ne niyam paḷāvavā, te sāru karavī paḍe chhe.
These talks cannot be grasped even in a hundred lives, therefore all should keep these talks in mind. And attach the jiva (i.e. have close association) with two good sadhus and three good devotees so that one does not fall from satsang. And if traces of lust and greed still remain, do not worry. Maharaj has said in the Vachanamrut, “Even if one has no desires of lust and greed, but if one’s jiva is not attached to the enlightened Sadhu of God, what is the use? In the absence of this attachment one will become demonic.”
Vaat 1.237
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 237 · Chapter 1 · Verse 237
Nitye lākh rūpiyā lāve ne satsangnu ghasātu bolato hoy to te mane na game; ne sūto sūto khāy paṇ Bhagwānnā bhaktanu sāru bolato hoy to tenī chākarī hu karāvu, evo māro swabhāv chhe.
If a person brings 100,000 rupees daily, but talks ill of satsang, I do not like it. And, even if a person only sleeps and eats, yet talks positively about the devotees of God, then I will arrange for his service. That is my nature.
Vaat 1.238
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 238 · Chapter 1 · Verse 238
Jo Moṭāpuruṣh maḷe to teno sang karavo, nīkar ūtartāno sang to karavo ja nahi.
If one can, associate with a great person, but never associate with an inferior person.
Vaat 1.239
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 239 · Chapter 1 · Verse 239
Māyānu bahu baḷ chhe. Te māyā to vairāgyane paṇ khāī jāy ne ātmaniṣhṭhāne paṇ chāvī jāy; kem je, pṛuthvīno jīv te pṛuthvīmā chonṭe.
Māyā has the strength to devour even the virtue of detachment and the knowledge of the ātmā. Since, a worldly jiva attaches to the world.
Vaat 1.240
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 240 · Chapter 1 · Verse 240
Bhagwān maḷyā, Sādhu maḷyā, te kalyāṇ to thāshe paṇ gnān vinā antarmā sukh na thāy.
We have attained God and his holy Sadhu, so moksha is assured, but without spiritual wisdom, inner peace is not attained.
Vaat 1.241
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 241 · Chapter 1 · Verse 241
Jem kusangī ne satsangīmā bhed chhe, tem sādhāraṇmā ne ekāntikmā bhed chhe. Ne nav Yogeshvar hatā,1 temā eke vāt karī tethī āṭh zānkhā paḍī gayā, pachhī te sarve maḷīne ekne māravā taiyār thayā. Tem e to evī vāt chhe. Ne je ekāntik hoy te to niṣhkām hoy, te ek Bhagwānnu ja nirūpaṇ karyā kare ne bījo sakām hoy, te Bhagwān pāse māgyā kare. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nav Yogeshvar Rhuṣhabhdevnā putro hatā. Sansārno tyāg karīne vichartā. Ek vār Prabuddha nāmnā Yogeshvare Janaknī sabhāmā sāru pravachan karyu. Saue tenā vakhāṇ karyā. Sāthenā bījā āṭh Yogeshvarone ā na gamyu. Tethī Prabuddhane bāndhyā ne kūvāmā nākhavā chālyā. Prabuddhe khūb ājījī karī ke, “Have pachhī hu vāto nahi karu,” tyāre chhoḍyā.
Just as there is a difference between a non-satsangi and a satsangi, similarly, there is a difference between an ordinary devotee and an enlightened devotee. One who is enlightened is free of worldly desires and constantly concentrates upon God. Others who are full of desires continually ask for worldly possessions from God.
Vaat 1.242
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 242 · Chapter 1 · Verse 242
Bhagwānnu ane Sādhunu māhātmya jem chhe tem samajātu nathī. Te koīne be ānā ne koīne chār ānā ne koīne āṭh ānā; paṇ jevu chhe tevu jaṇātu nathī. Ne sānkhya to muddal1 nathī. Ne sānkhya vinā kasar ṭaḷe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bilkul, taddan.
The greatness of God and his sadhu is not understood thoroughly – some understand 10% worth, some 25% worth and some 50% – but they do not understand it as it is. Also, we do not have knowledge of Sānkhya, and without it, our deficiencies are not removed.
Vaat 1.243
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 243 · Chapter 1 · Verse 243
“Keṭalākne Bhagwān tathā Sādhunā sambandhnu sukh āvatu hoy; te kenī peṭhe ne kem samaje to sukh āve?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “E to sādhutā shīkhe to āve; te vinā to doṣh pīḍe, tethī sukh na āve.” Pachhī pūchhyu je, “Keṭalākne sukh swapnamā āvatu hoy te kem āve?” Teno uttar je, “E to niradhār nahi, kem je, swapnamā to Bhagwān dekhāy ne bīju paṇ dekhāy, ne gnāne karīne thāy e ja sāchu chhe.”
Some experience the bliss of the association of God and his holy Sadhu. Like whom and in what way should one understand to experience this bliss? The answer to this question, “If one develops saintliness then one experiences it (bliss). Without this, our faults trouble us; so we do not experience bliss.” A question was asked, “Some experience this bliss in their dreams. How is this?” The answer, “That is not certain, since in dreams God may be seen and other things may also be seen. And only that bliss which is experienced by spiritual wisdom is true.”
Vaat 1.244
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 244 · Chapter 1 · Verse 244
Jem chhe em kahevāy nahi ne kahīe to aradhī sabhā ūṭhī jāy; paṇ shāstramā kahyā chhe evā kharekharā sādhu maḷe ne te kahe tem kare to koṭi janme kasar ṭaḷavānī hoy te āj ṭāḷī nākhe, ne brahmarūp karī mūke. E to Gokul gām ko painḍo hai nyāro!1 Ane ā to jībh zālīne2 bolīe chhīe, em bolyā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Painḍo eṭale mārg. Laukik mārgo karatā Gokuḷno eṭale ke Bhagwānno mārga judo ja chhe. (Brahmarūp thavāno mārga ja nyāro chhe.) 2. Sankoch rākhīne.
“We cannot say everything as it is. If we did, then half of the assembly would leave.1 However, if one attains the Sadhu that is mentioned in the scriptures, then he will eradicate our deficiencies - which would otherwise only be destroyed after a million births - and make one brahmarup. Gokul gām ko painḍo hai nyāro!2 We are speaking while holding our tongue.”3 This is what Swami said. Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s purport is that one should use discretion in revealing the greatness of the Sadhu because some people have difficulty understanding the greatness of the manifest. 2. In contrast to the worldly path, the path to Gokul - i.e., the path to becoming brahmarup - is special and unique. 3. Reluctantly or holding back from speaking completely.
Vaat 1.245
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 245 · Chapter 1 · Verse 245
Bhagwān jevu to koī padārtha nathī, te āpaṇne maḷyā chhe. Ne jeṇe dānt āpyā te chāvavānu nahi āpe? Ne āpaṇā kapāḷmā kāī roṭalā nahi lakhyā hoy? Ne āpaṇe kāī Prabhu vechī khādhā chhe? Māṭe Bhagwān bhūkhyā uṭhāḍe paṇ bhūkhyā suvāḍe nahi. Game tevī rīte paṇ khāvā āpe chhe, ne Prabhu bhajāy te sāru garīb rākhyā chhe. Kadāpi pṛuthvīnu rājya āpyu hot to narakmā paḍī chūkyā hot. Māṭe āpaṇne āpyu nathī. Ne ā deh to patrāvaḷāne ṭhekāṇe chhe, temā lāḍavā jamī levā. Te shu je, ā dehe Bhagwānne maḷī chūkyā pachhī dehne game tem thāo, ne ‘Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoy nahi, jem karashe tem sukh ja thāshe.’1 Ne amane to het āve chhe te vāt karīe chhīe je, ‘Swāminārāyaṇ'nā nāmno mantra bahu baḷiyo chhe, māṭe bhajan karyā karavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhāvārth: Bhagwān potānā dās eṭale ke bhaktanā shatru kyāreya hotā ja nathī. Te je kaī kare chhe te bhaktanā sārā māṭe ja kare chhe. Ā vāt Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīnā ‘Dāsnā dushman te Hari hoye nahi’ padmā ullekhāyelī chhe. Kīrtan Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’dī hoye nahi, Bhāī je kāī karashe te sukh thāshe; Aṇasamaje aṭpaṭu e lāge kharu, Paṇ samazīne juve to satya bhāse... Dās. 1 Bhāī sukhmā Hari kaho kene sāmbharyā, Jo dhan rāj ne parivār pāme; Rājnā sājmā Rāmjī visare, Vaḷī mālnā madnā madmā matta vāme... Dās. 2 Bhāī sansārnā sukh te dukh chhe dāsne, Teh Hari vichārīne nahī ja āpe; Paṇ jaktanā jīv te jukti jāṇe nahi, Aṇachhatā dāsnā doṣh sthāpe... Dās. 3 Bhāī dehtaṇu dukh teh sukh chhe santne, Jo akhanḍ varati vaḷī em rahe; Niṣhkuḷānand e dayā Nāthnī jāṇaje, Je samajyā te to em ja kahe... Dās. 4 [Kīrtan Sār Sangrah: 2/456]
There is no entity like God. We have attained him. He who has given us teeth, will he not give us something to chew? Are we not destined to get food? And have we given up God? (No.) So, God awakens us hungry, but does not send us to sleep hungry. He will give us food in any way possible. Also, he has kept us poor so we can worship him. Maybe if he had given us sovereignty over the world, we would have already fallen into hell. Therefore, he has not given it to us. ‘Dāsnā dushman Hari ke’di hoy nahi, jem karshe tem sukh ja thāshe.’ That is, “God can never be the enemy of his devotees. Whatever he does will result in happiness for the devotees.”
Vaat 1.246
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 246 · Chapter 1 · Verse 246
Ā vātunā karanārā durlabh chhe, manuṣhya deh durlabh chhe ne dehe sāju rahevu te paṇ durlabh chhe. E traṇ vāt durlabh chhe; te māṭe bhajan karī lejo.
A speaker of these talks is rare, the human body is rare and for the body to stay healthy is also rare. These three things are rare – therefore worship God, since it is the most suitable time.
Vaat 1.247
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 247 · Chapter 1 · Verse 247
Dattātreye be jīvnu kalyāṇ karyu,1 Kapile ek jīvnu kalyāṇ karyu2 ne Ṛuṣhabhdeve so jīvnu kalyāṇ karyu.3 Ane āj Sādhu kahe, “Ame daivī jīvnu kalyāṇ karīe paṇ āsurīnu kalyāṇ amārāthī thāy nahi.” Tyāre Bhagwān kahe, “Āsurīnu kalyāṇ ame karashu.” Te Munjo Sūru4 ne Mānbhā5 ne Joban Pagī6 ne Takho Pagī,7 e to pāpnā parvat kahevāy; ene to Bhagwān satsang karāve paṇ e Sādhuthī vaḷe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. 1. Kārtavīrya. 2. Yadurājā. 2. Potānā mātushrīnu. 3. Potānā so putrone sansārnī asārtā samajāvī tyāgāshram levaḍāvī kalyāṇ karyu. 4. Soraṭh panthaknā Lilākhā gāmno bhayankar lūnṭāro. 5. Roj chakalānī jībhnu shirāmaṇ karanār Mengaṇīnā rājā Mānsinha. 6. Charotarnā Vaḍtāl gāmno chor, lūnṭāro. Pagī - pageru kāḍhī chorne pakaḍnārī kom. 7. Bāmrolī gāmno lūnṭāro.
Dattatrey redeemed two jivas, Kapil redeemed one jiva (his mother, Devhuti) and Rishabhdev redeemed a hundred jivas (his sons).1 And today this sadhu says, “We will redeem virtuous jivas but are unable to redeem evil jivas.” At that time Bhagwan Swaminarayan said, “We will grant liberation to the sinful.” Munjo Suru, Manbha, Joban Pagi and Takho Pagi2 were all called mountains of sin. God can lead them to Satsang, but a sadhu2 is not able to do so. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dattatrey liberated Kartavirya and King Yadu. Kapil Muni liberated his mother. Rishabhdevji liberated his 100 sons by preaching to them about the perishable nature of the world and inspiring them to renounce. 2. Munjo Suru – a notorious dacoit in the Saurashtra region of Gujarat. Manbha – the ruler of Meghni village in Junagadh district. Daily he ate 500g of sparrows’ tongues! Joban Pagi – a notorious dacoit of Vartal village in the Kheda district of Gujarat. Takho Pagi – a notorious dacoit of Bamroli village in the Kheda district of Gujarat. All four were transformed by their association with Bhagwan Swaminarayan and became virtuous devotees. 3. Here, sadhu should not be understood as Aksharbrahman, but should be understood as ordinary sadhus. Since God resides in the Aksharbrahman Satpurush in totality, he also has the same power to transform evil jivas into pious ones.
Vaat 1.248
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 248 · Chapter 1 · Verse 248
Das hajār sūryanu tej Sudarshan Chakramā chhe. Teno dīvā jeṭalo prakāsh thāy eṭalu ghāṭu māyānu tam chhe, teno chhānṭo jīvmā nākhyo chhe e suṣhupti avasthā chhe, tene ṭāḷavā sāru Mahārājno avatār chhe.
The effulgence of ten thousand suns is present in the sudarshan chakra. But in comparison to the darkness of māyā, it is merely like a lighted wick. A droplet of it (darkness) has been put in the jiva – that is the state of deep sleep.1 To conquer it Maharaj has incarnated. Footnotes: 1. 1. The meaning of this phrase is: during the period of creation, God created the sthul and sukshma bodies from the kāran body. He also gave them the association of the three states: wakeful, dream, and deep sleep (sushupti). The tamogun predominates in the sushupti state and is closely associated with the kāran body. Therefore, Swami likens this state (i.e. the kāran body) with the darkness of māyā.
Vaat 1.249
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 249 · Chapter 1 · Verse 249
Jenu karyu thāy chhe te to jāṇe kāī jāṇatā nathī ne vachamāthī bījā keṭlāk mansūbā kare chhe.
No one knows the one responsible for everything that happens. Yet, in the midst of all that happens, others have so many [doubtful] thoughts.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s purport is to draw attention to the realization that God and the Sadhu know everything in Satsang. Specifically, they know everyone’s virtues and vices, good and bad actions, and good and bad intentions. Nothing is outside of their supervision. Not realizing this, aspirants in Satsang question why God and the Sadhu do not rebuke others who cause spoilage in Satsang or halt the growth of Satsang. Such are the thoughts of perceiving God and the Sadhu as human. However, one should realize that they know everything and allow certain things to happen; it is simply their divine action. There is no need to interfere with their divine actions.
Vaat 1.250
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 250 · Chapter 1 · Verse 250
Koṭi kalp thayā viṣhay bhogavyā chhe teno pāsh lāgyo chhe. Tene ṭāḷavānu kāraṇ Shikṣhāpatrīmā Nijātmānam brahmarūpam e ek ja shlok lakhyo chhe.
The impressions of having enjoyed the material pleasures for tens of millions of years have been engraved on the mind. To overcome them, the Shikshapatri reveals one shlok: ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam...’ i.e. believe one’s true self as ātmā, not the body.
Vaat 1.251
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 251 · Chapter 1 · Verse 251
Shāstramā Bhagwānne samadarshī kahyā chhe te kharu nathī, kāraṇ ke Bhagwān to bhaktanā chhe, paṇ abhaktanā nathī, māṭe samadarshī nathī.
Scriptures describe God as unbiased, but that is not true. Since, God belongs to the devotees, but not to non-devotees. Therefore, he is not unbiased.
Vaat 1.252
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 252 · Chapter 1 · Verse 252
Bhagwān potānā bhaktamā rahe chhe te pātra pramāṇe rahe chhe, te jem jem moṭā bhagavadī tem tem temā visheṣhpaṇe rahe chhe.
God resides in his devotees according to their suitability. The greater the devotee, the greater the extent to which he resides in him.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. This vat is based on Vachanamrut Gadhada I-41 in which Shriji Maharaj explains: “Purushottam Bhagwān enters and dwells in all of the above as their cause and antaryāmi. However, He does not manifest in Prakruti-Purush to the extent He manifests in Akshar; and He does not manifest in Pradhān-Purush to the extent that He manifests in Prakruti-Purush; and He does not manifest in mahattattva and the rest of the 24 elementsEN-2 to the extent that He manifests in Pradhān-Purush; and He does not manifest in Virāt-Purush to the extent that He manifests in the 24 elements... Purushottam Bhagwān manifests in various entities with various degrees of power according to the task to be accomplished through that entity.” Based on this narrative, the extent in which Purushottam Bhagwan resides in Aksharbrahman Satpurush is not equal to the extent he resides in any other entity.
Vaat 1.253
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 253 · Chapter 1 · Verse 253
“Bhagwān shūḷīnu dukh kānṭe maṭāḍe chhe. Em kare te kem jaṇāy?” E prashnano uttar je, “Āpaṇe paṇ evu keṭaluk thātu hoy ne brahmānḍmā paṇ thāy, te tapāsī jue to jaṇāy je, kāḷmāthī sukāḷ karyo tem keṭlāk upadrav ṭāḷī nākhe chhe.”
God reduces the punishment of the stake to that of a thorn prick.1 How can this be known? The answer, “We experience many such occasions and it also happens throughout the universe. By checking thoroughly we come to know that bad times are turned into good and many difficulties have been removed.” Footnotes: 1. 1. That is, someone is sentenced to death or some other horrendous fate, but then is saved from this fate and is only subjected to minor punishment.
Vaat 1.254
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 254 · Chapter 1 · Verse 254
Ā lokmā desh-kāḷ to lāge ne ochhu vartāy ke vadhu vartāy paṇ ruchi sārī rākhavī, ante ruchi sahāy kare chhe.
Time and place certainly do have an impact in this world. So, whether people sometimes observe more and sometimes less (is of little consequence), but have pure intentions. In the end, good intentions will help you.
Vaat 1.255
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 255 · Chapter 1 · Verse 255
Āvī vāt to kyāīye thātī nathī, māṭe viṣhay khoṭā thaī gayā chhe. Ne vāsanā jevu jaṇāy chhe, te to dehdhārīne em hoy; temā Sadāshivnī havelīnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu1 tathā Bhagwānnī ichchhā samajavī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Khambhātnā Sadāshiv nāmnā dhanāḍhya haribhakte kaḷā-kotarṇīvāḷī lākaḍānī havelī banāvelī. Tenā vāstu prasange Gopāḷānand Swāmīne teḍavā Vaḍodarā gayā. Swāmīne temane pandar divas rokīne jagatnā nāshvantpaṇānī khūb vāto karī. Evāmā gharethī kāgaḷ āvyo ke havelī baḷīne rākh thaī gaī chhe. Sadāshiv kahe, “Swāmī! Jo hu ahī na rokāyo hot to havelī bhego baḷī marat. Eṭalī mane āsakti hatī. E have vāto sāmbhaḷīne antarmāthī ja baḷī gaī.”
“These types of talks are not happening anywhere else; therefore, the vishays have become false. Yet, it may appear we have vāsanā because we have assumed the physical body.” Then, Swami mentioned Sadāshiv’s mansion1 and said one should understand it to be God’s will. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sadāshiv was a wealthy brāhmin from Khambhāt. He built a beautiful mansion made of wood carvings. He went to Vadodara to call Gopalanand Swami for the vāstu (ceremony performed on first entering a house). Swami kept him in Vadodara for 15 days and explained to him the perishable nature of the world. Then, he received a letter from home that the mansion burned to ashes. Sadāshiv said, “Swami, if you had not kept me here and talked to me, I would have burned with the mansion - that is the level of attachment I had. However, it has now been burnt from my heart.”
Vaat 1.256
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 256 · Chapter 1 · Verse 256
Āpaṇe potānā swarūpne Akṣhar mānavu. Te na manāy to paṇ sthūḷ dehne potānu mānavu nahi, ne Mahārājno mat to traṇey dehne na mānavā ne Akṣhar mānavu. E to jem brāhmaṇne gher janma thayo te brāhmaṇ, tem āpaṇne Bhagwān maḷyā te Akṣhar mānavu.
We should believe our true form to be akshar. If that cannot be believed, even then we should not believe the physical body as our true form. And Maharaj’s view was not to believe in the three bodies (as our own) and to believe ourselves as akshar. This is like a person born to a Brahmin family is a Brahmin, similarly, as we have attained God, we should believe our self as akshar.
Vaat 1.257
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 257 · Chapter 1 · Verse 257
Lākaḍānī ne loḍhānī beḍī karatā paṇ strī-dhannī beḍī kaṭhaṇ chhe ne moṭī chhe. Ne te bethī mukāy to pachhī indriyu-antahkaraṇnī beḍī moṭī chhe, ne ethī na dabāy e to māyāparno āvelo hoy te na dabāy, bījo dabāy. Ne indriyu-antahkaraṇthī na dabāy e dev ke manuṣhya na kahevāy.
The fetters of women and wealth are stronger and bigger than those of wood or metal. If these two can be overcome, then the chains of the senses and inner faculties are bigger. And one who is not bound by them has come from above māyā. Anyone else would be enchained. So, one who is not suppressed by the senses or inner faculties is a released soul and cannot be called merely a deity or a human being.
Vaat 1.258
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 258 · Chapter 1 · Verse 258
‘Shvān shūkar bilāḍ khar, tenā ṭoḷā māhyalo jant; Tene mūke karī sant, jo maḷe Sadguru Sant.’ Em kahīne kahyu je, “Vastu nahi koī Sant samānā! Te āpaṇne maḷyā chhe.”
‘Shvān shūkar bilāḍ khar, tenā ṭoḷā māhyalo jant; Tene mūke karī sant, jo maḷe Sadguru Sant.’1 Swami spoke this proverb and said, “There is nothing like the Sadhu. We have attained that Sadhu.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Even if the jivas like dogs, pigs, cats, and donkeys come into contact of a Satpurush who is Aksharbrahman, then he can make them brahmarup. This proverb is mentioned in ‘Hariguru Sant’ by Akhā.
Vaat 1.259
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 259 · Chapter 1 · Verse 259
Mahārāj kahetā je, “Nām kenu laīe, paṇ āgaḷ to kalyāṇ kevā karyā chhe? To potānā sāmarthya pramāṇe karyā chhe ne keṭlek to moṭā moṭā kūvā khodyā1 chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Dārū, māns, vyabhichār vagerene dhārmik swarūp āpī sharū karel adhogatinā pantho.
Maharaj used to say, “Whose name can we mention of those in the past and the type of liberation they granted? They liberated as according to their power, whereas, some dug great deep wells.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is pointing out that some people promoted alcohol, meat, adultery, and other immoral conduct as a form of dharma and caused people to fall from dharma. Just as a blind person falls into a well, ignorant people followed these immoral ways believing to be dharma and fell from the path of God.
Vaat 1.260
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 260 · Chapter 1 · Verse 260
Khaṭvāng Rājānu1 be ghaḍīmā kalyāṇ karyu. Te Sādhu to bahu dayāḷu chhe, te ene to khabar na paḍe paṇ pragaṭnā sambandhnu baḷ lakhe chhe em samajavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sūryavanshnā chakravartī rājā. Devo ne asuronī laḍāī vakhate devonā pakṣhamā rahī daityono sanhār karanār. Jyāre medānmā temane khabar paḍī ke potānu mṛutyu āvyu chhe, tyāre devonā vimānmā zaḍapthī Ayodhyā āvī Sarayūtīre besī, antarvṛutti karī gayā. Deh, parivār, rājya, sampatti badhāno sānkhya karī Bhagwānmā chitta joḍī dīdhu. (Bhāgwat: 9/9/41-49)
King Khatvang’s moksha was achieved in less than an hour.1 And the sadhu is very compassionate, however one does not know that. But understand that this is the power (i.e. to grant liberation instantly) of the company of the manifest form of God or his Sadhu as described in the scriptures. Footnotes: 1. 1. A powerful king of the Surya dynasty who fought on the side of the deities in their battle against the demons. When he realized he was soon to die, he sat in one of the heavenly planes of the deities and quickly went to Ayodhya to sit on the banks of the river Saryu. There, he meditated and gave up all attachments to his body, family, kingdom and wealth, and focused on God only. - Shrimad Bhagvat 9/9/41-49
Vaat 1.261
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 261 · Chapter 1 · Verse 261
Madhyanu Navmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne bolyā je, “Mahārājne Puruṣhottam jāṇato hoy ne desh-kāḷe satsangmāthī nīkaḷī jāy to paṇ Akṣhardhāmne pāme, ne em na jāṇato hoy ne satsangmā hoy to paṇ bījā dhāmne pāme.”
After reading Vachanamrut Gadhada II-9, Swami said, “If one knows Maharaj as Purushottam, but, due to circumstances, leaves Satsang, even then one attains Akshardham. And if one does not have this spiritual wisdom to recognize Maharaj as Purushottam but remains in Satsang, then he will attain another abode, but not Akshardham.”
Vaat 1.262
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 262 · Chapter 1 · Verse 262
Mahārāj kahetā ke, “Amāro droh kare chhe te paṇ amārā pakṣhamā bole chhe, kem je, e em jāṇe chhe je, koīk ek Bhagwān chhe, ne ā bījo kem Bhagwān thāy chhe? Māṭe e amāro droh karatā nathī.”
Maharaj used to say, “One who insults us is still speaking in our favour. Since, he certainly knows that there is a God, and why does this other one become God? Thus, he is not insulting us.”
Vaat 1.263
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 263 · Chapter 1 · Verse 263
Deh mūkīne pāmavā chhe te ja ā pragaṭ vātu kare chhe, paṇ em sarvene samajāy nahi. Ane je tyāg-vairāgyanī vātu karīe chhīe, te to mārge chaḍāvavā sāru karīe chhīe, paṇ samajavānu āṭalu ja chhe.
He (God) whom we want to attain after death is himself manifest in the form of this Sadhu and talking. But not all can understand this. And the talks we give on renunciation and detachment are to get you onto the path of God. Only this much has to be understood – that God is manifest today through this Sadhu.
Vaat 1.264
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 264 · Chapter 1 · Verse 264
Vachanāmṛutnā artha samajāy evā nathī, paṇ bahu abhyās rākhe to potānī meḷe samajāy evo Mahārājno var chhe. Ne ā gnān Mahārājne sarvene āpavu chhe.
It's not possible to understand the principles of the Vachanamrut, but Maharaj has given His blessings that, if one studies extensively, then they will be understood automatically. And Maharaj wants to give this knowledge to everyone.
Vaat 1.265
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 265 · Chapter 1 · Verse 265
Prakṛuti-Puruṣh kūṭasth1 te kahevāy ne gṛuhasth paṇ kūṭasth kahevāy ne sānkhyavichāre ne gnānne mate karīne nirlep paṇ kahevāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Achaḷ, aparivartanīya.
Prakruti-Purush can be considered unchangeable and gruhasthas can also be considered unchangeable. And according to the principle of Sānkhya and gnān, they can be considered detached.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s purport is to explain that, although Mul-Purush (an akshar-mukta of Akshardham) joins with Mul-Prakruti to start the creation process, he still remains detached from māyā. Similarly, even though gruhasthas have the association of māyā in their worldly path, because of their association with the Aksharbrahman Satpurush and their sānkhya gnān and gnān of Purushottam Bhagwan, they are also kutastha - something that is unchangeable or eternal.
Vaat 1.266
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 266 · Chapter 1 · Verse 266
Āj āpaṇāmāthī ekaḍmal1 karīne kāḍhī mūkyo hoy to paṇ te jagatno Prabhu chhe, te ājnāno evo mahimā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Swāminārāyaṇ Sampradāymā tyāgīonā niyam mujab tyāgī sādhu ekalā kyāy rahī shake ke farī shake nahī. Te hammeshā joḍmā ja hoy. Shrījī Mahārājnā vakhatmā keṭlāk sādhuo ā niyam-praṇālīne āsharelā nahi, tethī Shrījī Mahārāje temano tyāg karelo. Ā ekḍamalne niṣhṭhā-bhakti to Bhagwān Swāminārāyaṇnī rahelī ne strī-dhannā tyāgno niyam paṇ teo pāḷatā.
Today, a [sadhu] who is cast out as an ekadmal1 would still be the lord of the world. This is the greatness of the [sadhus] today. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ekadmal is a sadhu who had difficulty observing the strict prakarans that Shriji Maharaj issued for sadhus. These sadhus either left the sampradāy on their own or Maharaj cast them away. Because they did not travel in pairs, they were called ekadmal. Despite leaving the sampradāy, many still possessed faith in Bhagwan Swaminarayan and still abstained from the contact of women and wealth. Therefore, Swami mentions their greatness because they came into contact with God or the Sadhu even for a short duration.
Vaat 1.267
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 267 · Chapter 1 · Verse 267
Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane bāṇ vāgyā ne Prahlādne na vāgyā,1 e paṇ Bhagwānnu kartavya samajavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanu avatār-kārya pūru thayu ne Kaḷi Yugno prārambh thayo. Dvārkāmā Vishvāmitra, Kaṇva ane Nārad traṇe munio āvyā tyāre Rohiṇīnā putra, Sāraṇ vagere mashkarā yuvānoe bhegā maḷī Jāmbvatīnā putra Sānbne garbhavatī strīno vesh dharāvyo ne rhuṣhio pāse jaī kahyu, “Babhrunī ā patnī chhe tene shu janmashe?” Trikālagna munio krodhāymān thaī bolyā, “Ā Sānb bhayānak mushaḷne janma āpashe ne tenā dvārā Yadukuḷno nāsh thashe.” Ā shāpthī mushaḷ (lokhanḍno ṭukaḍo) janmyu. Yādavoe tenā nānā ṭukaḍāo karī dariyāmā nākhyu. Ā ṭukaḍāonī prabhāsnā dariyā kānṭhe dhārdār erakā nāmnī vanaspati ūgī ne eno ṭukaḍo māchhalīnā peṭmā gayelo te māchhīmārne maḷyo. Ā ṭukaḍo teṇe ek pāradhīne āpyo. Pāradhīe bāṇnu faḷu banāvyu. Prabhāsmā yātrā nimitte Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa sahit Yādavo āvyā ne Yādavo dārū pīne andaro-andar vanaspati laī laḍī maryā. Dūr rahyā rahyā Kṛuṣhṇe ā sanhār joyo. Bhāratnī laḍāīmā Kauravono sampūrṇa nāsh thayelo sāmbhaḷī, Gāndhārīe Kṛuṣhṇane shāp āpelo ke, “Tame kuḷe sahit nāsh pāmasho.” E shāp Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe svīkāryo ane pīpaḷā nīche besī Jarā nāmnā pāradhīnā bāṇthī dehtyāg karyo. Svayam Bhagwān hatā chhatā mṛutyudharma svīkāryo. (Mahābhārat: 16/2 thī 16/5) Prahlādjī bhakta hatā, to emanā māṭe khās avatār laī asurnā trāsthī temanī rakṣhā karī.
Shri Krishna Bhagwan was shot by arrows but Prahlad was not. That is the deed of Bhagwan.
Vaat 1.268
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 268 · Chapter 1 · Verse 268
Desh-kāḷ āve to satsangīnā gāmmā paḍyā rahīne gujarān karīe paṇ maravānī to bīk ja na lāge, ne kalyāṇ to tyāgī ne gṛuhasth e beyamā chhe.
If the time or place become adverse, then we would survive in a satsangi’s village; however, we have no fear of dying. And liberation is in both [āshrams]: renunciants and gruhasthas.
Vaat 1.269
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 269 · Chapter 1 · Verse 269
Haribhakta āgaḷ vātu karavānī āgnā karī ke vātu karajo; te vātu te shu je, “Swāminārāyaṇ Bhagwān chhe, Swāminārāyaṇ Bhagwān chhe.” Em vātu karajo.
Instructions were given to talk before the devotees. What are those talks? That, Swaminarayan is God, Swaminarayan is God. Talk like that.
Vaat 1.270
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 270 · Chapter 1 · Verse 270
Bhagwān to trīs varas satsangmā rahyā ne have Sādhu rūpe dasa-vīs peḍhī raheshe.
Maharaj stayed in Satsang for 30 years and now He’ll stay in the form of a Sadhu for ten to twenty generations.
Vaat 1.271
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 271 · Chapter 1 · Verse 271
“Jūnāgaḍhnā jamān Mahārāj be vār thayā chhe, ek vār Vartālmā ne bījī vār Gaḍhaḍāmā,” em kahyu. Te upar ek sante pūchhyu je, “Jamān thayā te shu samajavu?” Tyāre Swāmī belyā je, “Māyānu bandhan thāvā de nahi.” Pachhī farīne sante pūchhyu je, “Te jamāngaru kyā sudhī raheshe?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Āpaṇe chhīe tyā sudhī to kharu, paṇ hajī to Mahārājnu gnān chhe. Ne vaḷī Mahārāj kahe, ‘Jūnāgaḍh jāy tenī karoḍ janmanī kasar ṭāḷī nākhashu,’ te ame Gaḍhaḍethī āvyā tyāre e bhātu bandhāvyu hatu.”
Maharaj acted as surety for Junagadh twice – once in Vartal and a second time in Gadhada. On this, a sadhu asked, “What should we understand by the statement ‘was a surety’? Then Swami said, “It means he will not allow māyā to bind the devotees of Junagadh.” Then again the sadhus asked, “Until when will this surety remain in force?” Then Swami said, “It will certainly remain in force while we are here, but additionally there is Maharaj’s spiritual knowledge. And moreover, Maharaj says, ‘For all those who go to Junagadh to listen to the discourses, I will cure them of the drawbacks of ten million births.’ So, when I came from Gadhada, I had this boon with me.”
Vaat 1.272
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 272 · Chapter 1 · Verse 272
“Mūnzavaṇ āve to kem karavu?” E prashna pūchhyo, teno uttar karyo je, “‘Swāminārāyaṇ, Swāminārāyaṇ’ bhajan karavu tethī mūnzavaṇ ṭaḷī jāy.”
What should one do when in difficulty? This question was asked. The answer, chant ‘Swaminarayan, Swaminarayan,’ so that the worry is resolved.
Vaat 1.273
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 273 · Chapter 1 · Verse 273
Jhīṇābhāīe Mahārāj pāse Jūnāgaḍhmā mandir karavānu māgyu, te paṇ pote ja upajāvyu hashe. Te āhī mandir karyu ne temā sādhu paṇ evā ja rākhyā chhe. Te ā mandirmā kharaḍo1 to hajī sudhī karyo nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dān-dharmādā māṭenī lakhaṇī.
Jhinabhai asked Maharaj to build a mandir in Junagadh. This must have been inspired by Maharaj. So he built a mandir here and kept a Sadhu like himself here. And ever since, we have not needed to raise money.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Gunatitanand Swami focused more on increasing faith rather than raising money. He knew that when faith increases, the haribhaktas will surrender their whole and soul for the mandir. Therefore, he never spoke about giving money to the mandir.
Vaat 1.274
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 274 · Chapter 1 · Verse 274
Ā loknī sarva kriyā te chhokarānī ramat jevī samajavī, paṇ temā māl mānavo nahi, em nirantar joyā karavu.
All the activities of this world should be understood as child's play. Do not believe them to be of any worth. Continuously remember this.
Vaat 1.275
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 275 · Chapter 1 · Verse 275
Mahārāj kahetā je, “Amārāmā je guṇ ne avaguṇ chhe te kahīe chhīe je, amane ākhā brahmānḍnā jīv māne paṇ tenu amane mān na āve, e amārāmā guṇ chhe, ne ame anek jīvne samādhi karāvīe paṇ Muktānand Swāmīne tathā Gopāḷānand Swāmīne samādhi karāvīe nahī, e amārāmā avaguṇ chhe.”
Maharaj used to say, “Let me describe my virtues and drawbacks. All the jivas of the universe believe in me, yet it has not given rise to ego in me. That is my virtue. And I send countless jivas into samādhi, but do not place Muktanand Swami and Gopalanand Swami in samādhi. That is my drawback.”
Vaat 1.276
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 276 · Chapter 1 · Verse 276
Koī Bhagwān sambhāre tenī sevā māre karāvavī, tenā lūgaḍā māre dhovarāvavā ne tene māre beṭhā beṭhā khāvā devu chhe.
If someone remembers God, then I will arrange for his service, have his clothes washed and give him food at home.
Vaat 1.277
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 277 · Chapter 1 · Verse 277
Kathā-vārtā Badrikāshrammā ne Shvetdvīpmā ne Akṣhardhāmmā ne ā lokmā Moṭā Ekāntik pāse, e chār ṭhekāṇe thāy chhe ne bīje kyāī thātī nathī. Ne jyā viṣhay chhe tyā kathā-vārtā nathī.
Spiritual discourses are conducted in four locations: Badrikashram, Shvetdwip, Akshardham and in the presence of the great God-realized Sadhu of this world, and nowhere else are they conducted. And where there are worldly pleasures there are no spiritual discourses.
Vaat 1.278
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 278 · Chapter 1 · Verse 278
Āpaṇe kāīk kām sāru karyu hoy ne tenu āpaṇne mān āvatu hoy te sāru moṭā kahe je, “Ā kām bagāḍyu,” to paṇ rājī rahevu, kem je, āpaṇne to pūrvāpar1 sūjhe nahi ne Moṭā to dīrghdarshī chhe, te to āgaḷ thāvānu dekhe chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Āgaḷ-pāchhaḷnu.
If we have done some good work and we become proud of it, the great Sadhu says, “You have ruined the work.” Still, we should remain happy. Since, we do not know the context, and the great Sadhu has foresight – he can see what is to happen in the future.
Vaat 1.279
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 279 · Chapter 1 · Verse 279
Sānkhyavichār karavānī bahu vāt karī. Te sānkhyavichār to nitya niyam rākhīne karavo, ne sānkhya vinā to aradho satsang kahevāy, ne sānkhya vinā sukh thāy nahi, ne sānkhya chhe te to ākh chhe, ne ākhe karīne sarve dekhāy. Dattātrey sānkhyavāḷā ne sukhiyā rahetā. Māṭe sānkhyavichār karavā mānḍe to āvaḍe ne dhīre dhīre siddha thāy. Temā sānkhya shu je, ā lok, bhog, sarve khoṭu chhe; ne ātmā chhe te satya chhe ne ākāsh sarakho nirlep chhe; ne deh, indriyu, antahkaraṇ asangī chhe.
Swami talked at length about engaging in the thoughts of Sānkhya: Engage in Sānkhya thoughts on a regular, daily basis as a rule. And satsang is said to be only half complete without Sānkhya thoughts. Without Sānkhya there is no happiness, since Sānkhya is like the eyes. With it everything can be seen. Dattatrey practised Sānkhya and he knew how to be happy. Therefore, if one slowly practises Sānkhya, it can be attained. So what is Sānkhya? That this world and objects of pleasure are all false (perishable); and the ātmā is real and unaffected like the sky, and is not influenced by the body, senses and inner faculties.
Vaat 1.280
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 280 · Chapter 1 · Verse 280
Jeṇe Bhagwān arthe karyu hoy tene Bhagwān potānā dhāmmā laī jāy.
Bhagwān takes whoever does something for Him to his own abode.
Vaat 1.281
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 281 · Chapter 1 · Verse 281
Karoḍ kām ṭhele tyār pachhī Bhagwānnī kathā thāy, ne karoḍ kām ṭhele tyār pachhī Bhagwānnī vātu thāy ne dhyān to vaḷī te pachhī thāy.
Only by postponing tens of millions of worldly tasks can one engage in the discourses and talks of God. And meditation is possible only after that.
Vaat 1.282
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 282 · Chapter 1 · Verse 282
Bhagwānnā bhaktane traṇ prakārmāthī ek prakārnu dhyān to rahe chhe; te nishchayrūp dhyān rahe, ke Sādhu pāse jāvu chhe em rahe, ke hu Bhagwānno bhakta chhu em rahe; bākī teldhārāvṛutti mūrtimā rahe e to Swarūpānand Swāmī ādiknī vāt chhe.
A devotee is able to maintain one of the three types of meditation: meditation in the form of conviction in God’s divine form, in the form of the desire to be in the company of the Sadhu or in the form of the belief that ‘I am a devotee of God’. Otherwise, to maintain uninterrupted concentration on the murti of God is possible only for sadhus such as Swarupanand Swami and others.
Vaat 1.283
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 283 · Chapter 1 · Verse 283
“Āpaṇe to Bhagwān maḷyā chhe te potāne Akṣhar mānavu,” em bolyā. Te vāt upar prashna pūchhyo je, “Viṣhay parābhav pamāḍatā hoy ne Akṣhar kem mānavu?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “Viṣhay to dehnā bhāv chhe te ek paḍakhe rahyā chhe, to paṇ Akṣhar mānavu, paṇ ātmāne narakno kīḍo mānavo nahi ne āpaṇe to jem Vāmanjī bheḷī lākaḍī vadhī1 tem vadhatā jaīe chhīe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwāne Baḷi Rājā pāse traṇ pagalā pṛuthvī māngī tyāre ṭhīngaṇu swarūp dhārīne āvyā hovā chhatā virāṭ thayā ne sāthe lākaḍī lāvelā te paṇ evaḍī thaī.
Swami said, “We have met God and so should believe our self as akshar.” Hearing this someone asked a question, “Worldly pleasures defeat us, so how can we believe ourselves as akshar?” Swami answered, “The body needs worldly objects to survive, but that is only one aspect. Even (if worldly pleasures defeat us) so, believe oneself as akshar, but do not believe the ātmā to be a worm from hell. Then, just as the stick grew with Vamanji,1 we will grow.” Footnotes: 1. 1. When Vamanji was granted three steps of land by King Bali, Vamanji grew in size, and the stick he held in his hand also grew with him. Similarly, as our knowledge of ātmā and Paramatma increases we will grow spiritually.
Vaat 1.284
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 284 · Chapter 1 · Verse 284
“Sūkṣhma dehno kajiyo bahu bhāre chhe ne temāthī sthūḷ dehne dhakko lagāḍī de chhe, te kem karavu?” E prashnano uttar je, “E to moṭā moṭāne paṇ kajiyā chhe. Ne eṭalu maṭe tyāre to siddha thaī rahyā, pachhī shu karavānu rahyu? Eṭalu ja karavu chhe.”
“The dispute of the sukshma body1 (inner faculties) is extremely difficult and it affects the sthul body. What should one do?” Swami answered, “Even the great had such disputes. When [the disputes] subside, then one becomes achieved. What remains after that? That is all we need to do.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The dispute of the sukshma body result from the indriyas, mind, etc. They cause the waves of ego, anger, lust, jealousy, greed, etc. When the turmoil occurs internally, its effect can be seen physically in one’s actions and cause one to fall from their spiritual endeavor.
Vaat 1.285
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 285 · Chapter 1 · Verse 285
Bhagwānne jenī kasar ṭāḷavī hoy tene ā lokmā janma dharāvīne agnānī karī nākhe, ne te ati dīn thaī jāy ne tene pachhī evu thāy je, “Māru kalyāṇ shī rīte thāshe?” Evu karāvīne kasar ṭaḷāve.
When God wants to eradicate someone’s deficiency, he will give them a birth in this world and make them ignorant. Then, one becomes meek and dependent and one believes, “How will I be liberated?” God does that and eradicates his deficiency.
Vaat 1.286
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 286 · Chapter 1 · Verse 286
Ek harijane pūchhyu je, “Āvo jog na rahe ne kasar rahī jāy to kem thāshe?” Teno uttar karyo je, “Jeṇe āvo jog āpyo chhe tenā te ja kasar ṭaḷāvashe.”
A devotee asked, “What will happen if this type of company with you does not remain and our deficiencies remain?” The answer, “He who has given this company will cause removal of the drawbacks.”
Vaat 1.287
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 287 · Chapter 1 · Verse 287
Vartālnu Trīju Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu. Temā chār prakārnā bhaktanā bhed kahyā chhe. Temā ek to dīvā jevā, bījā mashāl jevā, trījā vījaḷīnā agni jevā ne chothā vaḍavānaḷ agni jevā. E Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne bolyā je, “Āj to satsangmā bahudhā vaḍavānaḷ jevā chhe.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Ā vākya prāsangik uchchārāyu chhe. Siddhāntnī draṣhṭie vaḍavānaḷ jevā satpuruṣh - mokṣhanā dātā ek samaye ek ja hoy chhe.
Vachanamrut Vartal-3 was read. It describes the difference between the four types of devotees. Of them, one is like a small earthen lamp, the second like a torch, the third is like a flash of lightning and the fourth is like the vadvānal (submarine volcanic) fire. After the reading of this Vachanamrut was over, Swami said, “Today in Satsang the vadvānal-like sadhu is present.”
Vaat 1.288
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 288 · Chapter 1 · Verse 288
Bhagwān bheḷā rahyā ne khoṭyu rahī gaī te shā kāraṇthī je, ā Sādhunā samāgam vinā.
Despite staying with God, what is the reason that faults remain? It is due to lack of close association with this Sadhu.
Vaat 1.289
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 289 · Chapter 1 · Verse 289
Bhagwān jevā ā Sādhu chhe, paṇ tenī pāse rahevātu nathī, e moṭī khoṭ chhe.
This Sadhu is like God, but that we are unable to stay with him is our great loss.
Vaat 1.290
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 290 · Chapter 1 · Verse 290
Have to Mahārāj Sādhu dvāre darshan āpe chhe, ne vātu kare chhe, ne vaḷī mūrti dvāre darshan āpe chhe.
At present Maharaj gives darshan and discourses through the Sadhu, and gives darshan through the murti.
Vaat 1.291
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 291 · Chapter 1 · Verse 291
Ame to koṭi kalp thayā joīe chhīe, paṇ pachās koṭi jojan pṛuthvīmā āvā Sādhu nathī.
I have been observing for tens of millions of years, but there is no Sadhu like this one on the whole of this huge earth.
Vaat 1.292
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 292 · Chapter 1 · Verse 292
"Moṭā parokṣha thayā pachhī ājanī peṭhe potānā āshritnī khabar rākhe ke na rākhe?" Teno uttar karyo je, "Moṭā kyā parokṣh thāy evā chhe? Bākī ājanī peṭhe dekhāy nahi ne khabar to em ne em rākhe, ne jo khabar na rākhe to brahmānḍnī sthiti kem rahe?"
After the great Satpurush becomes paroksh (i.e. leaves his body and returns to Akshardham), will he continue to take care of his followers like today or not? Swami replied, “Is the great likely to become paroksh at all? He may not be seen as he is seen today, but he will take care as usual. And if he does not take care, how will the universe continue to function?”
Vaat 1.293
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 293 · Chapter 1 · Verse 293
Indre Vishvarūpne māryo tenī chār brahmahatyā lāgī,1 temā ek to gurunī, bījī gornī, trījī brāhmaṇnī ne chothī brahmavettānī. Pachhī tene Nāradjī maḷyā. Teṇe kahyu je, “Tārā bhāī Vāmanjī chhe te Bhagwānno avatār chhe, māṭe teno tu āsharo kar.” Pachhī Indre Vāmanjīno nishchay karyo teṇe karīne brahmahatyā ṭaḷī gaī. Vāmanjīno āsharo karavāthī kām thayu, māṭe āsharo moṭī vāt chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vishvarūp Tvaṣhṭāno putra hato. Tenu mosāḷ daityakuḷmā hovāthī daityono pakṣha rākhato. Indre tene guru karī rājyapurohit nīmelo. Daityo par vijay meḷavavā Indre yagna ārambhyo. Vishvarūp hom kare ne daityone haviṣhyānnano chhāno bhāg āpe. Ā kapaṭ jāṇīne Indre Vishvarūpnā traṇe mastak kāpī nākhyā. Tethī chār brahmahatyā lāgī.
Indra killed Vishwarup and incurred the sins of killing a brāhmin four-fold: first was killing a guru, second was killing a gor (brāhmin involved with rituals), third was killing a brāhmin, and fourth was killing a brahmavettā. Then, he met Naradji who said, “Your brother Vamanji is the avatār of God. Seek his refuge.” Then, Indra developed faith in Vamanji and absolved the four sins. So, he was able to accomplish his task by seeking the refuge of Vamanji. Therefore, refuge is the greatest endeavor.
Vaat 1.294
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 294 · Chapter 1 · Verse 294
Koṭi tap karīne, koṭi jap karīne, koṭi vrat karīne, koṭi dān karīne ne koṭi yagna karīne paṇ je Bhagwānne ne Sādhune pāmavā hatā te āj āpaṇane maḷyā chhe.
That God and Sadhu we wanted to attain through endless austerities, chanting the name of God tens of millions of times, observances, donations and sacrifices, we have attained today.
Vaat 1.295
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 295 · Chapter 1 · Verse 295
Satsang thāy tene to dukh rahe nahi, te satsang te shu je, ātmā ne Paramātmā e be ja chhe.
When satsang is imbibed, no miseries remain. What is that satsang – it is that only ātmā and Paramatma exist for ever.
Vaat 1.296
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 296 · Chapter 1 · Verse 296
Nirantar māḷā ferave te karatā paṇ samajaṇ adhik chhe, māṭe mukhya e vāt rākhavī.
Understanding the form and greatness of God and his holy Sadhu is greater than continuously saying the rosary. So keep this as the main thought.
Vaat 1.297
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 297 · Chapter 1 · Verse 297
“Bhagwānnī mūrtine chintāmaṇi kahī chhe, te em samajāṇu chhe ke nathī?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Chintāmaṇi to kharī paṇ bāḷaknā hāthmā chhe.”
The murti of God is described as a jewel that fulfills all desires. But has it been understood properly? The answer to this question – it is indeed a wish-fulfilling gem, but in the hands of a child (i.e. an ignorant person).
Vaat 1.298
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 298 · Chapter 1 · Verse 298
Swarūpniṣhṭhā chhe ne mahimā chhe e to varne ṭhekāṇe chhe, ne bījā sādhan to jānne ṭhekāṇe chhe. Ne vaḷī samajaṇ chhe e to base bakhtariyāne1 ṭhekāṇe chhe ne viṣhay chhe e to ek bahārvaṭiyāne ṭhekāṇe chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Loḍhānā kavach pahernār sipāīo.
Resolute faith in the manifest form of God and knowledge of God’s greatness is like the bridegroom, that is, it is the main thing. All other spiritual endeavours for moksha are like the bridegroom’s entourage. And understanding of the manifest form of God and his holy Sadhu is like a force of 200 armed soldiers, and material pleasures are like outlaws.
Vaat 1.299
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 299 · Chapter 1 · Verse 299
Satpuruṣhne sambandhe karīne jīvne sanskār thāy chhe, te ek janme ke be janme paṇ Bhagwānnā dhāmne pamāḍe evo pragaṭno pratāp chhe. Tenī vikti je, enu darshan thāy, eno guṇ le, eno pakṣha le, e āgaḷ hāth joḍe ne vaḷī “Sādhu bahu sārā chhe” em bole ne ene ann-jaḷ āpe ityādik sambandh thāy; vaḷī, je zāḍ taḷe bese, vaḷī, je zāḍnu faḷ jame, vaḷī, je ḍhornu dūdh-dahī jame, ityādik anant prakāre jīvne sambandh thāy to te sarve Bhagwānnā dhāmne pāme. Evo pragaṭno sambandh baḷavān chhe ane parokṣhnā sanskārnu faḷ e chhe je, khāvā maḷe, dehe sājo rahe, ne lokmā ābarū-dharma rahe, e parokṣhnā āsharānu faḷ chhe.
The company of the Satpurush leaves impressions on the jiva. So, after a birth or two, the jiva attains the abode of God – that is the power of the manifest Satpurush. The details of his company: one has his darshan, imbibes his virtues, sides with him, folds one’s hands before him, says that this Sadhu is very good, serves him with food and water and associates with him in many such ways. Additionally, the tree he sits under, the tree from which he eats fruits, the cattle whose milk or yogurt he drinks and eats, etc. – due to such variety of associations the jiva has with him, it attains the abode of God. That is how powerful the association with the manifest form is. And the fruits of association with the non-manifest form (i.e. his murti) is that one gets food to eat, remains healthy, gains the respect of common people and upholds the dharma of this world.
Vaat 1.300
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 300 · Chapter 1 · Verse 300
Viṣhaymā to Vairāṭ, Pradhān-Puruṣh sudhī sarve gothā khāy chhe; paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā viṣhay nathī.
Up to Vairat, Pradhan-Purush and Prakruti-Purush all are chasing after material pleasures. But in Akshardham, there are no material pleasures.
Vaat 1.301
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 301 · Chapter 1 · Verse 301
Āpaṇe to Akṣhardhāmmā jāvu chhe evo ek sankalp rākhavo.
Our sole wish should be that we want to go to Akshardham.
Vaat 1.302
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 302 · Chapter 1 · Verse 302
Ā vātu to jenā bhūnḍā āshay hashe tene dabāvī daīne paṇ upar nīkaḷe evī chhe.
These talks are such that they suppress even those with evil intentions and make their good effects felt.
Vaat 1.303
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 303 · Chapter 1 · Verse 303
Ā lokmā Akṣharnu sukh te shu je, shubh sankalp thāy ne antarmā sukh vartyā kare e ja. Ne Jampurīnā jevu dukh te shu je, antarmā bhūnḍā ghāṭ thāy ne pīḍā thāy e ja.
What is the bliss of Akshar in this world? It is to get good thoughts and to always enjoy inner peace. And what is like the misery of hell? Evil thoughts and pain within.
Vaat 1.304
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 304 · Chapter 1 · Verse 304
Koṭi kalp thayā Bhagwān khāvā āpe chhe, to paṇ jīvne khabar na maḷe, e agnān chhe. Te Mahārāj kahetā je, “Amane annadātā to jāṇajo ne vadhāre mahimā to te pachhī.”
Since tens of millions of years, God has been giving food, but that the jiva still does not know this is its ignorance. Maharaj used to say, “At least believe me to be the provider of food. And understand my greater glory later.”
Vaat 1.305
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 305 · Chapter 1 · Verse 305
Pratham Prakaraṇnu Tresaṭhmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne mahimānī bahu vāt karī je, “Āmā kahyu chhe em samajāy nahi tethī jīv dūbaḷo rahe. Paṇ Bhagwānne pratāpe kām, lobh, svād, sneh ne mān te sarve samudra jevā chhe, paṇ gāynā pagalā jevā thaī jāshe, māṭe āvo mahimā chhe. Te sāru koī divas jīvmā durbaḷpaṇu āvavā devu nahi. Ne Lakṣhmī tathā Bhagwān to āpaṇī sevāmā chhe; kem je, mābāp to chhokarānī sevāmā ja hoy. Ne āpaṇe to jem karīe te thāy, paṇ jāṇīne dabāvī rākhyu chhe. Ne ā prāpti to moṭā īshvarne paṇ durlabh chhe.”
After reading Vachanamrut Gadhada I-63, Swami talked a lot about the glory of God: “The jiva remains weak because the glory of God is not understood as stated here. Lust, greed, taste, attachment and ego are all like the ocean,1 but, by God’s grace, they will become small like the footprints of a cow.2 Thus, this is the glory of God, so never allow the jiva to become weak. And Lakshmiji and God are in our service. Since, parents are naturally in the service of their children. So, whatever we wish will happen. But we have knowingly suppressed your powers and this attainment is rare even for great deities. Footnotes: 1. 1. Meaning, they are difficult to overcome. 2. That is, the base instincts will be easily overcome.
Vaat 1.306
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 306 · Chapter 1 · Verse 306
Āpaṇāmā viṣhaynī aruchi to Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmī, Kṛupānand Swāmī, Māvo Bhakta tathā Raṇchhoḍjī Ūnāvāḷā evā ghaṇākne hashe. Ne āpaṇu to dharme karīne shobhe chhe. Ne mokṣhanu kāraṇ to Bhagwānnī niṣhṭhā chhe.
Among us, many, such as, Nishkulanand Swami, Krupanand Swami, Mava Bhakta, Ranchhodji of Una town and others may dislike worldly pleasures. And we shine out because of dharma. But the cause of moksha is firm faith in God.
Vaat 1.307
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 307 · Chapter 1 · Verse 307
Bhagwāne je je nirmyu chhe te tem ja thāy chhe, te Bhagwāne nirmyā pramāṇe kanchan ne strīmā sau vadhu taṇāy chhe. Ne manuṣhyane maithunno niyam nathī ne pashu-pakṣhīne chhe. E ādik anek kaḷ chaḍāvī mūkī chhe, te tem ja thāy chhe.
Everything happens just the way God has ordained. So, as arranged by God, everyone is more drawn towards gold (wealth) and women. For man, there is no definite set of rules for intercourse, while for other animals and birds there is. This and other orders of creation have been established by God and that is how things happen.
Vaat 1.308
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 308 · Chapter 1 · Verse 308
Kāriyāṇīnu Sātmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Nishchay chhe e ja ātyantik kalyāṇ chhe, ne nishchay chhe e ja siddhadashā chhe, ane dekhvānu kahyu chhe te paṇ gnāne sahit jāṇavu tene ja kahe chhe, ne te vinā to dekhāy chhe to paṇ nyūn chhe. Ne viṣhay khoṭā karavā e to sānkhya samajavu. Ne ‘ek Bhagwān bhāse’ em kahyu chhe te paṇ nirvikalp nishchay rūpe bhāse.”
After reading Vachanamrut Kariyani-7 ‘Vairagya Due to Obsession; Ultimate Liberation’, Swami said, “Firm faith in God is itself ultimate liberation and the state of spiritual perfection. To see God is to know the real form of God. Even without this knowledge, he can be seen, but it is inferior.
Vaat 1.309
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 309 · Chapter 1 · Verse 309
Koī vātnī chintā āve to Bhagwānne māthe nākhī devī ne āpaṇe to baḷiyā nahi ne e to baḷiyā te ene rakṣhā karatā āvaḍe, jem Prahlādjīnī rakṣhā karī tem anek prakāre rakṣhā kare.
When one encounters worries relating to anything, place them on God’s shoulders. We are not strong, while he is strong and knows how to protect. Just as he protected Prahlad, he protects us in countless ways.
Vaat 1.310
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 310 · Chapter 1 · Verse 310
Sādhuno ne Sādhunā sangno mahimā bahu kahyo ne bolyā je, “Have ethī āghī vāt nahi chāle. Ne jem Bhagwānnā guṇno pār na āve tem sādhunā guṇno paṇ pār nahi,” Em kahīne te upar Gurunu ang1 bolāvyu ne pote paṇ bheḷā bolyā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Brahmānand Swāmī rachit Manhar chhandamā varṇavel guru mahimā: ‘Gurudev jananī janak ru sambandhi bandhu, pūran atyant sukh guruhu se pāyo hai, nāsikā badan bain dine guru divya nain, shobhit shravan deke shabda sunāyo hai; diye guru kar pāv shītaltā shiṣhyabhāv, gururāy pinḍahu me prāṇ ṭhaharāyo hai, kahat hai Brahmānand kand sukh dayāsindhu, gurudev mero ghāṭ dūsaro banāyo hai.’ (Swamini Vat 1/73ni padtip)
Swami talked at length about the Sadhu and the glory of his company. Then he said, “No talks can describe him further. And just as there is no limit to the virtues of God, similarly, the virtues of the Sadhu are limitless.”
Vaat 1.311
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 311 · Chapter 1 · Verse 311
Āpaṇe to so-base māṇasne pānkhamā laīne ūḍī jāīe evā chhīe ne te karatā ākhā brahmānḍnā jīvne laīne ūḍī jāīe evā chhīe, ne te karatā anant koṭi brahmānḍne paṇ laī jaīe evā chhīe, paṇ evu manāy nahi; te shāthī je, manuṣhyākṛuti chhe.
We (Swami referring to himself) have the power to fly away with 100 or 200 people in our wings. Even more, we can take all of the jivas of the brahmānd and fly away. Even more, we can take away the infinite brahmānds. But [you] have difficulty believing this. Why? Because we have the physical form of a human.
Vaat 1.312
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 312 · Chapter 1 · Verse 312
Jīvnī avaḷāī te shu kahīe? Jīv te jīv ja. Te kahyu chhe je, ‘Ūnṭ to saghaḷe ange vānku,’ evo jīv avaḷo. Vaḷī, lambkarṇa jevo jīv tenu paṇ Bhagwānne sāru karavu chhe.
What can be said about the crookedness of the jiva? A jiva is a jiva. It has been said, “A camel is crooked in all its limbs.” That is how crooked1 the jiva is. Still, God wants to help the jiva by doing good to it, although the jiva is like a donkey. Footnotes: 1. 1. The jiva being crooked means it will do whatever it wants. Sometimes it will comply with God’s and the Satpurush’s commands and sometimes it will do the opposite.
Vaat 1.313
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 313 · Chapter 1 · Verse 313
Antarmā ṭāḍhu hoy ne koīk vachan māre to bhaḍako thāy, te samādhān karavāno upāy gnān chhe.
When one is at peace within and someone speaks harshly, thus causing one intense anger within, the solution lies in spiritual wisdom.
Vaat 1.314
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 314 · Chapter 1 · Verse 314
Bhagwānno ne Moṭā Sādhuno nishchay thayo hoy te potāne pūrṇakām māne ne tene bījānā sangnī apekṣhā na rahe. Temā draṣhṭānt je, jenā gharmā so karoḍ maṇ dāṇā hoy tathā so karoḍ rūpiyā hoy to tene kāḷ paḍe to paṇ maravānī bīk na lāge. Vaḷī bīju draṣhṭānt je, be hajār bakhtariyā bheḷā hoy tene lūnṭāvānī bīk na lāge. Tem ja mahimā sahit nishchayvāḷāne bīk nahi.
If one has firm faith in God and his great Sadhu, one feels fulfilled and has no desire for any other company. For example, one who has 1000 million kilos of grains or a 1000 million rupees is not afraid of death if famine strikes. Another example, if one is protected by 2000 armed soldiers one is not afraid of being looted. Similarly, one who has firm faith coupled with the knowledge of God’s greatness has no fear.
Vaat 1.315
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 315 · Chapter 1 · Verse 315
Pṛuthvīnu rājya kare ne na bandhāy, jo gnān thāy to. Ne te vinā to vanmā jaīne rahe to tyā paṇ Bharatjīnī peṭhe bandhāy. Māṭe gnān shreṣhṭh chhe.
If one attains spiritual knowledge, one is able to rule the world and not become attached. And without it, one may go to the forest and still become attached, like Bharatji. Therefore, acquisition of spiritual knowledge is the best solution.
Vaat 1.316
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 316 · Chapter 1 · Verse 316
Nānu chhokaru hoy tene bhay āve to potānā māvatarnī koṭe bāzī paḍe, tem ja āpaṇe harkoī dukh āve to Bhagwānnu bhajan karavu, stuti karavī, te Bhagwān rakṣhā kare.
When a young child is afraid, it clings to the neck of its mother. Similarly, in times of misery, we should worship and pray to God. God will protect us.
Vaat 1.317
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 317 · Chapter 1 · Verse 317
Amāro mat to anek prakārnī kriyā karāvīe to paṇ kriyārūp thāvā daīe nahi ne temā bandhāvā daīe nahi ne teno niṣhedh karyā karīe; ne bījā kriyā karāve te to temā joḍī dīe, te kriyārūp thaīne kriyā kare ne kriyāmāthī nivṛutti pāme to paṇ tenā mansūbā kare; ne amāro mat evo je, kriyā karavāmā paṇ kriyārūp na thāvu ne kriyā mūkīne paṇ tenā mansūbā na karavā ne vyavahār āvyo te kriyā to karavī paḍe, paṇ teṇe karīne ja pūrṇapaṇu mānavu nahi.
My opinion is that I will engage people in countless activities, but will not allow them to become absorbed in them, nor allow them to become attached to them and I shall warn against them. If others join people in work, they submerge them in it and even when retired from it, their thoughts are preoccupied with it. My opinion is that one should not become submerged in doing work nor be preoccupied with its thought after stopping it. As we have responsibilities, we have to do the work, but do not feel fulfilled merely by the work.
Vaat 1.318
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 318 · Chapter 1 · Verse 318
Pratham sādhankāḷmā to pūru gnān thāy nahi tyā sudhī satsangnu sukh āve nahi. Te kenī peṭhe? To jem pratham thoḍo varasād varase tyāre nadīmā navu-jūnu pāṇī bheḷu thāy te mūḷagu bagaḍe. Pachhī jyāre ghaṇo varasād thāy tyāre sarve navu pāṇī thāy, tem bahu samāgam karatā karatā satsangnu sukh āve chhe.
During one’s initial endeavours, until complete knowledge is attained, the bliss of satsang is not experienced. What is this like? At first when only a little rain falls, new and old water mix in the river with the result that the water is spoilt. Then, later on, when a lot of rain falls, all the water is new. Similarly, by maintaining close association with the great Sadhu, the bliss of satsang is experienced.
Vaat 1.319
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 319 · Chapter 1 · Verse 319
Koīkne Bhagwān pradhān hoy ne koīkne vahevār pradhān hoy. E beyne barābar faḷ kyāthī maḷashe? Māṭe ā vāt paṇ jāṇī rākhavī.
Some had God predominant and some have worldly duties predominant. How can the two attain the same fruit? Therefore, one should understand this.
Vaat 1.320
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 320 · Chapter 1 · Verse 320
“Āj din sudhī to kārakhānā karāvyā ne have to gnān devu chhe te fare ja nahī.” Ne vaḷī kahyu je, “Sarvenā sukh jovā ne sarvenā rūp jāṇavā ne ā Bhagwān vinā bījā koī Bhagwānmā māl nahi evu gnān shīkhavu.” Ne vaḷī kahe, “Girnār jevaḍo kām, ne Meru jevaḍo mān ne Lokālok jevaḍī vāsanā, e sarvenā mūḷ ukhāḍī nākhavā chhe; evu gnān āpavu chhe.”
Until today we have run workshops to build mandirs, etc. and now we want to give such spiritual knowledge that one will never waver. Then Swami said, “See the happiness of all (animals, man, gods, etc.) and know the form of all different types of happiness; but apart from this God, there is no value in any other god. Learn this spiritual wisdom.” Then Swami said, “We want to uproot the Girnar-like lust, Meru-like ego and Lokalok-like strong worldly desires. We want to give such spiritual wisdom.”
Vaat 1.321
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 321 · Chapter 1 · Verse 321
“Āpaṇā dehmā jīv bheḷo koṭānkoṭi sūryano prakāsh chhe, paṇ te hamṇā dekhāy to koīnī gaṇatī na rahe,” em mahimā kahyo.
Along with the jiva, in our body there is the glow of tens of millions of suns. If we could see that now, we would not recognize the importance of anybody. Such glory was revealed.
Vaat 1.322
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 322 · Chapter 1 · Verse 322
Muktānand Swāmī jevā moṭā sādhu vāt kare to be hajār māṇasnī sabhā beṭhī hoy te saunā sankalpnā uttar thātā jāy, em Mahārājnā sādhu to jāṇe ne vāt kare.
If a great sadhu like Muktanand Swami speaks, then even in an assembly of two thousand people, all their inner questions will be answered. Thus, Maharaj’s sadhus know people’s problems and talk accordingly.
Vaat 1.323
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 323 · Chapter 1 · Verse 323
Mahārājno mat to kathā, kīrtan, vārtā, dhyān e ja karāvavu chhe. Ne māṇasne to swabhāv paḍī gayā te bīju karyā vinā rahevāy nahi. Tyāre have āpaṇe shu karīe? Ne āvo jog chhe temā nahi samajāy ne swabhāv mūkīne moṭā sāthe nahi joḍāy to te moḍo dhāmmā jāshe, emā kāī Bhagwānne utāvaḷ nathī ne ā kārakhānā to dahāḍe dahāḍe vadhatā jāshe.
Maharaj’s wish is to encourage only spiritual discourses, devotional songs, spiritual discussions and meditation. And man has developed such a nature that he cannot live without doing other mundane things. So, now, what should we do? We have this association (with the great Sadhu), but if a person does not understand and shed his base instincts and join with the great Sadhu, then he will go to Akshardham late. In this, God is in no hurry and these worldly activities will increase daily.
Vaat 1.324
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 324 · Chapter 1 · Verse 324
Ā Sādhu jevā chhe evā jaṇāy to tene mūkīne chheṭe khasāy nahi. Ne kāīk chamatkār jaṇāve to to Vyāpkānand Swāmīnī peṭhe bandhīkhānā thāy. Māṭe kāī nathī dekhāḍatā te paṇ ṭhīk chhe.
If this Sadhu is known as he really is, then one will not be able to leave him and go elsewhere. And if he shows some miracles, like Vyapkanand Swami, it will only result in bondage for us.1 So, it is appropriate that he does not show such miracles. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vyapakanand Swami was a very powerful sadhu of the Swaminarayan Sampraday. In Botad, the mare of the local ruler, Hamir Khachar, had died and everyone was upset. Seeing this Vyapakanand Swami used his powers to revive the dead mare by taking the jiva of a mosquito and placing it in the mare. When Shriji Maharaj heard about this he said, “It is not our job to perform miracles. People will bring the dead and ask us to revive them and distract us from our spiritual task.” Thus, Maharaj explained that spiritual wisdom is more important than miracles.
Vaat 1.325
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 325 · Chapter 1 · Verse 325
Vyavahāreṇ sādhuh, te ekbījāne vyavahār paḍyāthī sādhutānī khabar paḍe chhe, paṇ te vinā sādhupaṇu jaṇātu nathī.
‘Vyavahārena sādhuhu.’1 One’s saintliness becomes known when one interacts with others. But without this interaction, saintliness remains unknown. Footnotes: 1. 1. A sadhu is recognized by his dealings with other people.
Vaat 1.326
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 326 · Chapter 1 · Verse 326
“Āj to Moṭāno sambandh chhe te sukh varte chhe paṇ desh-kāḷe to āvo jog na rahe to paṇ sukh rahe evo sho upāy chhe?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Moṭānā guṇ, vibhūti, aishvarya, pratāp, gambhīrpaṇu, dhīrajpaṇu e ādik Moṭānā mahimāno vichār karīe, ne Moṭā haiyāmā sfure teṇe karīne sukh varate.”
Today we are happy because we have the company of the great (Sadhu). But if circumstances change and this company does not remain, how can we still remain happy? The answer to this question, “Think of the glory of the great (Sadhu): his virtues, personality, powers, influence, thoughtfulness, patience, etc. And thoughts of the great will spring up in one’s heart, as a result of which one will be happy.”
Vaat 1.327
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 327 · Chapter 1 · Verse 327
“Ā jīvne koī dahāḍo ghaḍpaṇ āvatu hashe ke nahi?” Em kahīne vaḷī kahyu je, “Jīvne gnān thāy tyāre ghaḍpaṇ āve paṇ te vinā to ghaḍpaṇ āve nahi.”
“Does this jiva ever become old?” Saying this, Swami said, “When the jiva attains spiritual knowledge it becomes mature. Without this, it does not become mature.”
Vaat 1.328
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 328 · Chapter 1 · Verse 328
Bhagwānne arthe āpaṇe je je karyu chhe ne karīe chhīe te jāṇe chhe ne jene khoḷe māthu mūkyu chhe te rakṣhā karashe ne āpaṇu to Bhagwān bahu mānī le chhe.
Whatever we have done and are doing for God, he knows. As we have placed our head in his lap, he will protect us. And God considers our little efforts to be a lot.
Vaat 1.329
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 329 · Chapter 1 · Verse 329
Gnānīne Bhagwāne potāno ātmā kahyo chhe. Te Uddhav gnānī. Ne premīnu Bhagwān rākhe to kharā, paṇ gnān vinā adhūru. Ne Sachchidānand Swāmīne taras lāgī tethī Mahārājne taras chhīpe nahī, pachhī Sachchidānand Swāmīne pāṇī pāyu tyāre Mahārājne taras chhīpī. To paṇ Mahārājno mat Nijātmānam brahmarūpam mānavu em chhe.
God has called the spiritually wise his ātmā. Uddhav was spiritually wise. God will certainly care for those with affection, but without spiritual knowledge one is incomplete. When Sachchidanand Swami was thirsty, Maharaj’s thirst could not be quenched. Then, when Sachchidanand Swami was served water Maharaj’s thirst was quenched. Still Maharaj’s opinion is that one should believe one’s ātmā as brahmarup.
Vaat 1.330
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 330 · Chapter 1 · Verse 330
Puruṣhne strīnā jevu het Bhagwānmā thāy nahi. Ene to gnāne karīne het thāy, ne Kṛupānand Swāmīnu ne Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīnu het strīnā jevu, em Mahārāj kahetā.
A man cannot develop the same type of love he has for a woman toward God. He can develop love for God because of gnān though. And Maharaj used to say, “Krupanand Swami’s and Nishkulanand Swami’s love was like that of a woman.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Nishkulanand Swami and Krupanand Swami possessed natural love for Maharaj because of their past sanskārs. Moreover, their love for Maharaj was like that of a faithful wife (pativratā).
Vaat 1.331
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 331 · Chapter 1 · Verse 331
Jaḍbharat ā loknā vyavahārmā joḍāṇā nahi. Te shā sāru je, Parameshvar bhajavāmā bandhan thāy, te sāru gānḍā kahevāṇā, ne bījā ā lokmā laī manḍe tene māṇas ḍāhyā kahe chhe. Paṇ Parameshvar bhajavānā mārgmā ḍāhyā nathī.
Jadbharat did not engage himself in worldly affairs. Why? So that attachment for worshipping Parameshwar (God) develops. For that, he was called foolish. And others work tirelessly in the world and people call them wise. But on the path of worshipping God, they are not wise.
Vaat 1.332
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 332 · Chapter 1 · Verse 332
Bhagwānnī kathā to kevī chhe je, chokiyāt āvīne kahe je, “Jāgo! Jāgo!” Pachhī jāge tethī chorno bhay ṭaḷī jāy, tem kathā to evī chhe.
What are the spiritual discourses of God like? A guard comes and says, “Wake up! Wake up!” We wake up and the fear of thieves is removed. Similarly, spiritual discourses are a security force like this.
Vaat 1.333
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 333 · Chapter 1 · Verse 333
Shikṣhāpatrīno chhello shlok nitya bole chhe temā kahyu chhe je, Nijāshritānām sakalārtihantā, sadharmabhakteravanam vidhātā; Dātā sukhānām manasepsitānām tanotu kṛuṣhṇokhilamangalam naha. Potānā āshrit je bhaktajan temanī je samagra pīḍānā nāsh karanārā evā ne dharme sahit je bhakti tenī rakṣhānā karanārā evā ne potānā bhaktajanne manvānchhit sukhnā āpanārā evā je Bhagwān te amārā samagra mangaḷne vistāro.
It is said in the last shloka of the Shikshapatri that is read daily: Nijāshritānām sakalārtihantā, sadharma-bhakteravanam vidhātā; Dātā sukhānām manasepsitānām tanotu kṛuṣhṇo-khila-mangalam naha. May God, destroyer of all miseries of his followers, protector of bhakti coupled with dharma, and bestower of all desired happiness to his devotees, bestow his devotees with prosperity.
Vaat 1.334
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 334 · Chapter 1 · Verse 334
Ek ruchivāḷā be ja hoīe to hajāro ne lākho chhīe ne te vinā to hajāro ne lākho hoīe to paṇ ekalā ja chhīe em samajavu.
Two people with the same inclination are equal to thousands and hundreds of thousands. Without this, know that even if we are thousands and hundreds of thousands, we are alone.
Vaat 1.335
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 335 · Chapter 1 · Verse 335
Bhagwānne potānā bhaktane mārī-kūṭīne paṇ brahmarūp karavā chhe.
God wants to make his devotees brahmarup, by any means.
Vaat 1.336
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 336 · Chapter 1 · Verse 336
Shāstramā kahyu chhe je, ‘Shreyānsi bahuvighnāni’ Ane lokmā kahe chhe je, ‘Sārā kāmmā so vighna,’ māṭe Parameshvar bhajavāmā ne Parameshvarnu swarūp samajavāmā bahu antarāy chhe. Te antarāyne oḷakhīne ne tethī mukāīne bahu khapvāḷo hoy te Parameshvar sanmukh chāle, nīkar chalāy evu nathī; kem je, ā lokmā anek antarāy chhe.
It is said in the scriptures, “Shreyānsi bahu vighnāni,” and in the world, people say, “A hundred obstacles arise in doing good deeds.” So, to worship God and understand his form there are many obstacles. One who is determined identifies these obstacles, overcomes them and walks towards God; otherwise it is not possible to walk to him, since there are countless obstacles in this world.
Vaat 1.337
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 337 · Chapter 1 · Verse 337
Pūrvano sanskār evu kahevāy chhe, te pūrvano sanskār te pūrvajanmanu karelu hoy tene kahevāy em na samajavu, tyāre pūrvasanskār te shu je, āj je kriyā karīe te āvatīkāle pūrva kahevāy em samajavu. Māṭe āpaṇe Moṭāno samāgam thayo te āj āpaṇe ghaṇu pūrva thayu.
One should not understand the sanskārs of past births as what one has done in their past births. So, what are the sanskārs of past births? They are the actions done in the present that will become the past actions in the future. Therefore, that we have the association of the Great [Purush] today is an abundant past.
Vaat 1.338
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 338 · Chapter 1 · Verse 338
Ā kīrtanmā kahyu chhe e vāt nirantar sambhārī rākhavī je, Udho sant sukhī re sansār me... Rājā bhī dukhiyā ne rank bhī dukhiyā, dhanpati dukhit vikār me; Vinā vivek bhekh sab dukhiyā, jūṭhā tan ahankār me... Udho. Māṭe samajaṇvāḷāne sant kahe chhe; te Ambarīṣh, Prahlād ne Janak ādik rājā hatā, paṇ te sādhu kahevāy chhe em samajavu.
Continually remember the message of this kirtan: Udho sant sukhi sansārme, Rājā bhi dukhiyā, rank bhi dukhiyā,  dhanpati dukhit vikārme, Vinā vivek bhekh sab dukhiyā,  Juthā tan ahamkārme...Udho1 One with such understanding is called a sadhu. Thus, though Ambrish, Prahlad and Janak, etc. were kings they have been described as sadhus. Footnotes: 1. 1. Uddhav! The only person happy in this world is a sadhu; kings are unhappy, paupers are unhappy, and even the rich are unhappy because of their (unlimited) desires; If they have no sense of discrimination, even renunciants of all types are unhappy. Oh Uddhav! People possess ego due to ignorance.
Vaat 1.339
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 339 · Chapter 1 · Verse 339
Gnān gnānmā paṇ ghaṇā bhed chhe. Kenī peṭhe je, ek Gujarātnu ghoḍu hoy tenī sāmī lākaḍī ugāmīe to bhāgī jāy ne ek to Kāṭhiyāvāḍnu paloṭel1 ghoḍu hoy te to taravāryu, barachhiyu ne bandūkuno varasād thāto hoy temā paṇ sāmu chāle, e rīte gnān gnānmā bhed chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tālīm āpī taiyār karelu.
Knowledge is of different types. For instance a stick raised before a horse from the Gujarat region will frighten it and it runs away. In the case of a trained horse from the Kathiawad region it is not frightened by swords, spears and gunshots. Similarly, spiritual knowledge is of different levels.
Vaat 1.340
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 340 · Chapter 1 · Verse 340
Āgaḷ je bhakta thaī gayā te koīnī ājanā satsangīne upamā devāy nahi. Kem je, āgaḷ thayā te koī Akṣhardhāmnā nivāsī nahotā ne āj to Puruṣhottamnā āshrit chhe, te sarve Akṣhardhāmnā adhikārī chhe.
The devotees of the past cannot be equaled to the present-day satsangis. Why? Those of the past were not residents of Akshardham; whereas, devotees today have the refuge of Purushottam and are worthy of Akshardham.
Vaat 1.341
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 341 · Chapter 1 · Verse 341
Kathā kare, kīrtan kare, vātu kare, paṇ ‘Ā deh hu nahi,’ em māne nahi. Māṭe āṭhe pahor bhajan karavu je, ‘Hu deh nathī ne dehmā rahyo evo je hu ātmā chhu, brahma chhu, Akṣhar chhu ne māre viṣhe Paramātmā Parabrahma Puruṣhottam pragaṭ pramāṇ akhanḍ rahyā chhe. Te kevā chhe? To sarva avatārnā avatārī chhe, sarva kāraṇnā kāraṇ chhe ne sarva thakī par chhe; te pragaṭ ā mane maḷyā te chhe.’ Ā vātmā sānkhya ne yog bey āvī rahyā. Iti Shrī Sahajānand Swāmīnā shiṣhya Shrī Guṇātītānand Swāmīe karelī vātomā ‘Bhagwān ne santno mahimā’ kahyo e nāme pahelu prakaraṇ samāpt.
An aspirant engages in discourses, sings bhajans and talks about God, but does not believe, “I am not this body.” Therefore, 24 hours-a-day remember, “I am not the body, but I am the ātmā, who lives in the body. I am brahman, akshar and within me Paramatma Parameshwar Purushottam himself is eternally present.” What is he like? He is the cause of all avatārs, the cause of all causes and is above all. And his manifest form is the one I have attained. In this statement, both Sānkhya and Yoga are incorporated.
Vaat 1.342
Swamini Vato Prakaran 1 Vaat 342 · Chapter 1 · Verse 342
Akṣhardhāmmā kem sukh chhe? Je, jem rājāno chhokaro game tem farato fare paṇ rājyano dhaṇī chhe, em sukh chhe. Ne keṭlāk mukta to nirvikalppaṇe joḍāī rahyā chhe ne keṭlāk to vātu, mahimā kahe chhe ne sāmbhaḷe chhe. Jem ahī chhe, tem ja tyā chhe, emā lagār paṇ fer nathī. [Vāt 306, 1985 Āvṛutti]
Translation unavailable